Access

Administrator’s Guide for WindowsDM/DB Access

August 1994

DNA113310Version 5.0

Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract,and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification oramendment of such warranties.

The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not beconsidered commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for anyerror that may appear in this document.

The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordancewith the terms of this license.

No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied byIntergraph or its affiliated companies.

TrademarksCLIX, Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. DBACCESS, DMANDS,DM/CAPTURE, DM/MANAGER, DM/REDLINE, DMRS, DM/VIEW, I/NFM, and TD1 are trademarks of IntergraphCorporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright 1994 Intergraph CorporationAll Rights Reserved

Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software licenseagreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protectedby copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without properauthorization.

RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) ofThe Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and(2) of Commercial Computer Software — Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.

Unpublished — rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Intergraph CorporationHuntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

We want your suggestions...

We are continually working on updates and improvements to the TIM and Database Systemsdocuments. If you have suggestions, you can reach us by any of the following means:

Mail

FAX

Electronic Mail

If you need help, call...

Product & Documentation Support

Training Registration

You can access the TIM and Database Systems Product Training Directory on-line using theIntergraph On-line Reference Library (I/ORL) CD.

Order Desk

Intergraph General Information

7/93

Table of Contents v

Table of Contents__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

vi Table of Contents

Table of Contents vii

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Table of Contents

1. Before You Begin .................................................................................................. 1 - 3

1.1 Using On-line Help ...................................................................................... 1 - 6

1.1.1 Parts of the Help Window ................................................................ 1 - 6

2. Getting Started ..................................................................................................... 2 - 3

2.1 DM/DB Access Structure and Functions .................................................... 2 - 42.2 Changes to DM/DB Access ........................................................................... 2 - 52.3 Creating a Database .................................................................................... 2 - 52.4 Attaching a RIS Schema .............................................................................. 2 - 52.5 Templates ..................................................................................................... 2 - 6

2.5.1 Template Libraries ........................................................................... 2 - 6

2.6 Join Columns ................................................................................................ 2 - 7

2.6.1 Multi-Schema Joins .......................................................................... 2 - 72.6.2 Outer Joins ....................................................................................... 2 - 82.6.3 Edit Relations ................................................................................... 2 - 8

3. Application Builder ............................................................................................... 3 - 3

3.1 Application Components .............................................................................. 3 - 33.2 Programming a Windows Application ......................................................... 3 - 4

3.2.1 Visual Interface API ......................................................................... 3 - 5

3.3 Handling Events .......................................................................................... 3 - 53.4 Accessing the Application Builder ............................................................... 3 - 5

4. Dialogs ................................................................................................................... 4 - 3

4.1 Dialog Types ................................................................................................. 4 - 3

4.1.1 Default Dialogs ................................................................................. 4 - 3

4.1.1.1 Database Utilities Gadgets ............................................... 4 - 44.1.1.2 Graphic Utilities ................................................................ 4 - 54.1.1.3 General Utilities ................................................................ 4 - 5

viii Table of Contents

4.1.2 Blank Dialogs ................................................................................... 4 - 5

4.2 Dialog Design Considerations ..................................................................... 4 - 64.3 Dialog Scripts ............................................................................................... 4 - 64.4 Accessing the Dialog Builder ....................................................................... 4 - 7

4.4.1 Dialog Builder Toolbox ..................................................................... 4 - 8

5. Reports .................................................................................................................. 5 - 3

5.1 Report Types ................................................................................................ 5 - 3

5.1.1 Default Reports ................................................................................. 5 - 35.1.2 Blank Reports ................................................................................... 5 - 5

5.1.2.1 Unrelated Tables Reports .................................................. 5 - 6

5.2 Accessing the Report Builder ...................................................................... 5 - 65.3 Processing Reports ....................................................................................... 5 - 7

6. Edit Script ............................................................................................................. 6 - 3

7. Template Librarian .............................................................................................. 7 - 3

Accessing the Template Librarian ....................................................................... 7 - 3

8. Bitmap Loader ...................................................................................................... 8 - 3

Accessing the Bitmap Loader ............................................................................... 8 - 3

9. Database Edit ....................................................................................................... 9 - 3

9.1 Accessing Database Edit .............................................................................. 9 - 39.2 Creating and Using Query Criteria ............................................................ 9 - 5

9.2.1 Using Query Functions .................................................................... 9 - 5

9.3 Editing Database Values ............................................................................. 9 - 7

10. SQL Statements ................................................................................................. 10 - 3

11. Schema Edit ........................................................................................................ 11 - 3

11.1 Accessing Schema Edit ............................................................................ 11 - 3

12. DB Access Graphics ............................................................................................ 12 - 3

12.1 DB Access Graphics Linkages ................................................................. 12 - 412.2 Database Edit Graphics Linkages Functions ......................................... 12 - 412.3 DB Access/MicroStation Vector Graphics ............................................... 12 - 5

Table of Contents ix

12.3.1 Accessing DB Access from a MicroStation Design File ............. 12 - 5

12.4 DB Access Raster Graphics ..................................................................... 12 - 7

12.4.1 Workflow for Raster Graphics .................................................... 12 - 7

12.4.1.1 DB Access Raster Graphics Dialog ........................... 12 - 10

13. DB Access Commands ........................................................................................ 13 - 3

Add Query (Database Edit) ................................................................................ A - 1Add Query (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ A - 3AND/OR Toggle (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... A - 5Attach DAP Link (Database Edit) ..................................................................... A - 7Attach DAP Link (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... A - 10Attach DB Linkage (Database Edit) .................................................................. A - 12Attach DB Linkage (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. A - 15Attach File Link (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... A - 17Attach Note Link (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... A - 19Auto Sequence (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... A - 21Build Schema List (Schema Edit) ...................................................................... B - 1Button (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................................... B - 4Cancel (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................................... C - 1Cancel (Raster Graphics) ................................................................................... C - 3Change All (Database Edit) ............................................................................... C - 4Change All (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... C - 6Change Row (Database Edit) ............................................................................. C - 8Change Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. C - 9Check Box (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ C - 11Clear All Dialogs (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... C - 12Column (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................... C - 13Column (Report Builder) .................................................................................... C - 14Combo Box (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... C - 18Copy Field ........................................................................................................... C - 19Copy Gadget (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ C - 21Copy Line ............................................................................................................ C - 23Copy Redlines (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... C - 25Counter (Report Builder) .................................................................................... C - 27Create/Alter Table (Schema Edit) ...................................................................... C - 29Create/Edit Group (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... C - 35Create Sequence (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... C - 36Current Row (Database Edit) ............................................................................ C - 38Current Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ C - 39Current Row Slider (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. C - 40Current Row Text (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... C - 42Current Table Text (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. C - 44Database Utilities (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... D - 1Date ..................................................................................................................... D - 3Define Structure ................................................................................................. D - 5Delete (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................................... D - 11

x Table of Contents

Delete All (Database Edit) ................................................................................. D - 12Delete All (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. D - 13Delete Field ......................................................................................................... D - 15Delete Gadget (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... D - 17Delete Group (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... D - 19Delete Line .......................................................................................................... D - 20Delete Redlines (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ D - 21Delete Row (Database Edit) ............................................................................... D - 23Delete Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... D - 24Delete Sequence (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... D - 26Delete Space ........................................................................................................ D - 27Derived ................................................................................................................ D - 28Design Options .................................................................................................... D - 30Dial (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... D - 32Display Group (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... D - 34Display Labels (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... D - 36Display Dialog (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... D - 38Document List (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... D - 40Draw Arc (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................. D - 43Draw Arrow (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. D - 45Draw Block (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. D - 47Draw Circle (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. D - 49Draw Ellipse (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ D - 51Draw Filled Block (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... D - 53Draw Filled Circle (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... D - 55Draw Filled Ellipse (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. D - 57Draw Filled Shape (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... D - 59Draw Freehand (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... D - 61Draw Line (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ D - 63Draw Shape (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. D - 65Draw Symbol (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... D - 67Draw Text (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ D - 69Drop From Group (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... D - 71Drop Table (Schema Edit) .................................................................................. D - 72Dump Template .................................................................................................. D - 73Edit Code (Database Edit) .................................................................................. E - 1Edit Code (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. E - 5Edit Dialog Parameters (Dialog Builder) .......................................................... E - 7Edit Field ............................................................................................................ E - 10Edit Gadget (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. E - 11Edit Line ............................................................................................................. E - 13Edit Privileges (Schema Edit) ............................................................................ E - 16Edit Query (Database Edit) ............................................................................... E - 18Edit Query (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... E - 19Edit Report Parameters ..................................................................................... E - 21Erase Fence (Raster Graphics) .......................................................................... E - 23Exit ...................................................................................................................... E - 24Expanded Summary (Dialog Builder) ................................................................ E - 26Fence Block (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................... F - 1Fence Copy (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. F - 2

Table of Contents xi

Fence Delete (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ F - 4Fence Edit (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ F - 6Fence Move (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. F - 9Fence Operations (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... F - 11Fence Shape (Raster Graphics) .......................................................................... F - 12Field Format (Report Builder) ........................................................................... F - 13Fields On/Off (Database Edit) ............................................................................ F - 15Fields On/Off (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... F - 16Field Operations (Report Builder) ..................................................................... F - 18Field Plus (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. F - 19Fit View (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................... F - 20Fit (Raster Graphics) .......................................................................................... F - 22Gadget Groups (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... G - 1Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder) .................................................................. G - 2Gadget Sequencing (Dialog Builder) .................................................................. G - 3Gauge (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................................... G - 4General Utilities (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... G - 5Grid (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... G - 6Grid Lock (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. G - 7Group Box (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ G - 9Group Copy (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. G - 10Group Delete (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... G - 12Group Edit (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... G - 14Group Move (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. G - 17Group Operations (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... G - 19Help (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... H - 1Initialize Query (Database Edit) ........................................................................ I - 1Initialize Query (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... I - 2Insert Row (Database Edit) ................................................................................ I - 4Insert Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... I - 5Insert Space (Report Builder) ............................................................................ I - 7Key Column (Database Edit) ............................................................................. K - 1Key Column (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. K - 2Line (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... L - 1Line Operations (Report Builder) ...................................................................... L - 3Line Script .......................................................................................................... L - 4Links Commands (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... L - 7Linkage Mode (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... L - 9List Box (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................... L - 11Load File (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................. L - 12Load File (Raster Graphics) ............................................................................... L - 14Load From Library ............................................................................................. L - 15Locate Graphics (Database Edit) ....................................................................... L - 18Locate Graphics (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... L - 19Measure (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................... M - 1Measure (Raster Graphics) ................................................................................ M - 3Modify Sort ......................................................................................................... M - 4Move Field ........................................................................................................... M - 8Move Gadget (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ M - 10Move Line ............................................................................................................ M - 12

xii Table of Contents

Move Redlines (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... M - 13Multiple Column (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... M - 15Multi-Column Field (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. M - 18Multi Gadget (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... M - 19Multiple Reports (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... M - 23New Blank (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... N - 1New Blank (Report Builder) ............................................................................... N - 2New Default (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. N - 4New Default (Report Builder) ............................................................................ N - 6Next Row (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. N - 9Numeric ............................................................................................................... N - 11Override Key-in (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... O - 1Page ..................................................................................................................... P - 1Pan (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................................... P - 3Pan (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................................ P - 5Pick Row (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................. P - 6Place Fence Block (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... P - 8Place Fence Shape (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... P - 10Place Field (Report Builder) ............................................................................... P - 12Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ P - 14Place Line ............................................................................................................ P - 22Plot Window (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ P - 25Plot Window (Raster Graphics) .......................................................................... P - 27Previous Row (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... P - 28Process Dialog ..................................................................................................... P - 30Process Query (Database Edit) .......................................................................... P - 31Process Query (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... P - 32Process Report .................................................................................................... P - 34Query (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................................... Q - 1Quit (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... Q - 3Quit (Raster Graphics) ....................................................................................... Q - 5Radio Button (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... R - 1Raster View (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. R - 3Rectangle (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. R - 5Relational Operator (Dialog Builder) ................................................................ R - 6Remove Fence (Database Edit) .......................................................................... R - 8Remove Fence (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... R - 10Remove Linkage (Database Edit) ...................................................................... R - 12Remove Linkage (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... R - 15Report (Database Edit) ....................................................................................... R - 17Report (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................................... R - 18Restore Defaults (Database Edit) ...................................................................... R - 19Restore Defaults (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... R - 20Review (Database Edit) ...................................................................................... R - 22Review (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................................... R - 24Review Element (Database Edit) ....................................................................... R - 26Review Element (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... R - 29Review Sequence (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... R - 31RIS Schema Manager ......................................................................................... R - 32Rotate (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................................... R - 72

Table of Contents xiii

Rotate Raster (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................ R - 74Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. S - 1Save Options ....................................................................................................... S - 3Save Report ......................................................................................................... S - 5Schema Select (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... S - 7Scrollbar (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................. S - 9Select Redlines (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ S - 11Set Query (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. S - 13Show Group (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. S - 15Show Links (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. S - 16Show Links (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................... S - 18Single Column (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... S - 19Single Report (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... S - 23Slider (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................................ S - 25Spin Box (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................... S - 27SQL Statement (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ S - 28Symbol (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................................... S - 30System Command (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... S - 32Table Select (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. T - 1Text (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... T - 3Text Box (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................... T - 4Text (Report Builder) .......................................................................................... T - 5Text Size .............................................................................................................. T - 7Time .................................................................................................................... T - 8Undelete Fence (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ U - 1Undelete Field (Report Builder) ......................................................................... U - 2Undelete Gadget (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... U - 3Undelete Group (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... U - 4Undelete Line (Report Builder) .......................................................................... U - 5Update View (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ U - 6Update (Raster Graphics) .................................................................................. U - 8Update Active (Database Edit) .......................................................................... U - 9Update Active (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... U - 10Update Row (Database Edit) ............................................................................. U - 12Update Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. U - 13Undo Redlines (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... U - 15User Gadgets (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... U - 17User Variable (Report Builder) .......................................................................... U - 19USTN Command (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... U - 22Window Area (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... W - 1Window Area (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................ W - 3Window Center (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ W - 4Window Center (Raster Graphics) ..................................................................... W - 6Window Scroll (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... W - 7Window Scroll (Raster Graphics) ....................................................................... W - 9Worksheet (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ W - 10Zoom In (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................... Z - 1Zoom In (Raster Graphics) ................................................................................. Z - 3Zoom Out (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. Z - 4Zoom Out (Raster Graphics) .............................................................................. Z - 6

xiv Table of Contents

Appendix A: DB Access Environment Variables ..................................................... AA - 3

Appendix B: DB Access Reserved Tables ................................................................ BB - 3

B.1 Tables Needed for Raster Graphics ................................................................... BB - 4B.2 Unique Row Identification ................................................................................. BB - 4

B.2.1 mslink Column ....................................................................................... BB - 4B.2.2 Key Columns (mscatalog Table) ............................................................ BB - 4B.2.3 Unique Index .......................................................................................... BB - 6

B.3 Coded Columns and mscodelist ......................................................................... BB - 6B.4 mscolumns .......................................................................................................... BB - 8

Appendix C: Timestamp Columns ........................................................................... CC - 3

Appendix D: DB Access Error Messages ................................................................. DD - 3

Appendix E: DB Access Global Variables ................................................................ EE - 3

Glossary ....................................................................................................................... GL - 3

Index ............................................................................................................................ IN - 3

Before You Begin 1 - 1

Before You Begin__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1 - 2 Before You Begin


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________1.

Before You Begin

DM/DB Access is a member of the Intergraph’s DM family of products. It is a comprehensiveapplication builder and integration tool. The product combines an intuitive, graphicalinterface for dialog building with extensive open systems capabilities. This combination letsyou build custom applications that integrate diverse databases, platforms, and applications.By enabling extensive interoperability, DM/DB Access allows an organization’s network ofinformation to be shared by multiple users with individual needs at workgroup,departmental, and enterprise wide levels.

Do not attempt to run DM/View or DM/Redline if you are using any viewing andredlining functions in DM/DB Access. If you are using any NFM functions, do notattempt to run DM/Manager. There are calls made to .dll files from DM/DB Accessthat could cause the applications to close and any data being manipulated could beadversely affected.

Document Purpose

This document describes the functions and commands in the Intergraph DM/DB AccessAdministrator Toolkit product. This document is intended for database systemadministrators.

Document Prerequisites

This document assumes that you:

Understand SQL database terminology and structure.

Are familiar with the Intergraph Relational Interface System (RIS).


Related Documentation

You can refer to the following documents for additional information:

DNA1001 DB Access Programmer’s GuideDNA1116 Relational Interface System (RIS) for Windows NT SQL User’s GuideDNA0016 Intergraph I/Forms Reference ManualDDA0013 I/NFM Administrator’s User’s Guide

Additional Information

The text files containing information about the product are delivered with DM/DB Access.The README.TXT file is located in the c:\win32app\ingr\dba directory. Located inc:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc directory are other text files containing information.

Document Conventions

Filenames and directory paths appear in italic typeface. However, the italic typeface isalso used for emphasis of new words or important phrases. For example:

c:\windows

Command names, menu names, tools, system prompts and messages, and keys mayappear in boldface type. For example:

File menu

— OR —

Press Enter

The word mouse refers to the 2-button or 3-button mouse.

The word select means to select a command by pressing the left mouse button over amenu command or by pressing the Alt key and the underlined charactersimultaneously.

The word choose means to choose a button or icon by pressing the left mouse buttonover a Toolbar button, or application icon.

The word reset means to terminate a command initiated with the mouse. Reset bypressing the right mouse button.

The word identify means to define an area or place graphic elements in a graphics file.For PCs, identify with the left mouse button.


The phrase key in generally means to enter data into a field on a dialog box. Toadvance to the next field, use the Tab key.

Do not use the Enter key to advance to the next field. This key is mostlyused as the default key to accept a dialog box instead of pressing the OKbutton.

System key-ins, keywords, and programming code segments, appear in monospacedtype. For example:

main ( )

— OR —

commit

In actual usage, keywords can be in either upper or lowercase.

Words that appear in angle brackets, < >, are identifiers or names that you mustsupply, or dynamic information that can change for each error message. For example:

ERROR: Error opening the file <filename>

Phrases in square brackets, [ ], are optional phrases.

Curly braces contain several options (used in conjunction with a logical OR symbol ( | ))or phrases that can be repeated (used in conjunction with [, ...]). A comma followed by aseries of three periods in square brackets ([, ...]) indicates that the last phrase containedwithin curly braces ({}), or the last item, can be repeated numerous times (separated bycommas).

For example: { <column> <data type> } [, ...] means that numerous column names andassociated data types can be specified (separated by commas).

The logical or symbol ( | ) separates phrases or keywords within curly braces ({}) thatcan be used alone but not together.

For example: { user | database } means that either the user keyword or thedatabase keyword can be specified, but not both.

This symbol notes important information.

This symbol cautions about operations that can cause limited damage.


This symbol warns about operations that can cause severe damage.

1.1 Using On-line Help

On-line Help is an on-line reference tool accessible at any time the application is in use. Theon-line Help contains a description for each command and tool and step-by-step proceduresfor common tasks. For example, if you need to perform a certain task, search and display thetopic. You can move or resize your application and Help windows so that they are next toeach other. This lets you follow the procedures without having to search for the pages in thedocumentation.

1.1.1 Parts of the Help Window

To view the on-line Help, select Contents from the Help menu. To get more specificinformation, select one of the major topics or perform a search on a specific topic.

Use To

Contents Display a listing of the table of contents forthe on-line Help file.

Search Locate information about a certain topic thatyou enter in the Search box.

Back Take you back to the previous Help topics youhave already viewed.

History Display a sequential list of every Help topicyou have viewed during your current Windowssession.


Find Display a dialog box used to retrieve partial or

full text strings in the help file. Use theHints button for information on constructingyour search query.

<< View the previous topic in a series of relatedtopics. The button is dimmed when you reachthe first topic in the series.

>> View the next topic in a series of relatedtopics. The button is dimmed when you reachthe last topic in the series.

If the graphics in the on-line Help appear distorted, check your graphics driver.If you are using an Intergraph TD1 machine, the S3 1024x768 256 color (LargeFont) distorts the graphics slightly. Changing to the (Small Font) versioncorrects the display. If you are using other drivers, check with your PC manualfor information about available graphics drivers.

Getting Started 2 - 1

Getting Started__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2 - 2 Getting Started


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________2.

Getting Started

DM/DB Access is a relational database tool that lets you access ANSI/ISO SQL-standarddatabases supported by the Intergraph Relational Interface System (RIS). DM/DB Accesscan create reports and dialogs that link otherwise incompatible information: CAD files,ASCII files, scanned documents and drawings, and RIS-supported databases.

DM/DB Access is comprised of the DM/DB Access Administrator Toolkit and a DM/DB Accessruntime product.

The DM/DB Access Administrator Toolkit is designed for the system databaseadministrator or person who controls the databases on a network. It lets you designcustom dialogs and reports to determine the levels of access different users can have tothe databases on your network.

The DM/DB Access runtime product provides the software required to run dialogs andreports that are generated with the DB Access Administrator Toolkit.

One person can use the DM/DB Access Administrator Toolkit to generate custom dialogs forall database users on a network. Other workstations on the network require only the DBAccess runtime product to use the dialogs to access and manipulate databases across thenetwork.

DM/DB Access also lets you design and run reports on alphanumeric user data, binary, andASCII data. You can customize user data reports that are provided with Intergraphapplications.

For more information, see these sections:

2.1 DM/DB Access Structure and Functions

2.2 Changes to DM/DB Access

2.3 Creating a Database

2.4 Attaching an RIS Schema

2.5 Templates

2.6 Join Columns

2.7 Edit Relations


2.1 DM/DB Access Structure and Functions

The DM/DB Access Administrator Toolkit comprises four functional areas:

Dialogs — This function lets you create dialogs that control the level of access differentusers have to your company’s database resources. You can design dialogs that:

— Provide a user with read-only or read/write access to one or more tables in one ormore databases.

— Restrict a user’s access to specific columns in a table.

— Access information from more than one table through the use of join columns.

— Contain gadgets that execute PC-NT or MicroStation commands, or call DB Accessscript functions.

— Call other dialogs.

Reports — This function lets you design report templates, which process informationfrom a relational database to generate report output. You can:

— Interactively place column fields to report on one or more tables in one or moredatabases.

— Place fields to display text, the date, time, and page number, and to provide numericinformation (totals, averages, and so forth).

— Establish sort criteria, print conditions, and reset conditions for lines and fields inthe report.

— Use system and user-defined variables to build scripts that provide more flexibilityin formatting report output.

Utilities — This function includes Database Edit, SQL Statements, and Schema Edit.

— Database Edit gives you a graphic window of the attached database. You can editrows in the database, create query criteria to search for rows with commonproperties, or generate on-screen reports to review the universe of rows that thequery criteria create.

— SQL Statements let you create, store, and recall commonly used Structured QueryLanguage statements.

— Schema Edit provides an interactive tool for creating and reviewing RIS schemas,building a schema list, and creating and altering tables.

Raster Graphics — This function lets you load and view raster graphics and text files.You can link a raster file to other raster files, to text files, or to database rows.


2.2 Changes to DM/DB Access

For a complete listing of changes since the last release of this document, see thec:\win32app\ingr\dba\readme.txt file.

2.3 Creating a Database

Before you use DB Access, you must create a database with your relational databasemanagement system (RDBMS).

Each RDBMS has specific requirements for creating a database. See theRDBMS-specific documents for information.

2.4 Attaching a RIS Schema

DB Access attaches to a database through the Intergraph Relational Interface System (RIS).RIS is a generic relational database interface that isolates the differences in specific vendors’relational database management systems (RDBMSs).

Each user of a database must have a RIS schema created for that database. A schemadefines a unique database/user combination in the commercial RDBMS. See the RelationalInterface System (RIS) for Windows NT SQL User’s Guide for information on creatingschemas.

The following methods, listed in order of precedence, attaches a schema to DB Access.

If no schema is attached when DB Access is invoked, you can specify a schema in theSchema field on the main dialog. You can key in the schema name or select the listindicator at the end of the field to display a list of available schemas. Select a schemafrom the list.

You can specify a RIS schema with the -s command line option when you invoke DBAccess from the DOS prompt. For example:

dba -s <schema>

You can set the environment variable DBA_SCHEMA in your propertities under thecommand line on c: drive or the autoexec.bat file.

See the section DB Access Environment Variables for information on using DB Accessenvironment variables.

2.5 Templates

DB Access stores various types of output as templates. For example, you can save reportscreated with the Report Builder as report templates in a template library. Templates can beused repeatedly or they can serve as the starting point for new templates.


The following types of templates can be stored in a template library:

Applications

Bitmap

Dialogs

Design options

Query criteria

Palettes

Relations

Reports

Report structures

Scripts

SQL statements

Status Bar

Toolbars

You must assign a name for a template when saving it to a template library. Templatenames must consist of 20 or fewer alphanumeric characters with no embedded spaces. It isrecommended that you use the underbar character (_) between words.

2.5.1 Template Libraries

A template library is a data file in which you can store templates. You can create multiplelibraries and group templates according to application, use, privilege, or type.

A special command-line process, the Template Librarian (templib), lets youmanipulate templates and template libraries. See the section TemplateLibrarian for more information. The Template Librarian is also located on theDB Access main menu.

Any time you see a Library field on a dialog, you can create a new template library bykeying in a template library name that does not exist (full or relative filename) andanswering Yes to create it.


To attach a template library, you can specify a library name:

1. Using the -l option when you invoke DB Access from the command line under propertieson c: drive. For example:

dba -l <library>

2. In the Library field of the Load From Library dialog.

3. In the DBA_LIB environment variable. (You can also specify a list of template librariesin the DBA_LIB_LIST environment variable.)

2.6 Join Columns

DB Access lets you relate the data in any two RIS-supported database tables that share acommon column. These join columns are not required to have the same name, but they musthave common values.

The following figure shows the columns for the manufacturer, parts, and sale tables createdby the auto.sql file. Potential join columns are highlighted.

2.6.1 Multi-Schema Joins

You can use multi-schema joins to relate information from more than one schema. Multi-schema joins require that you specify a schema list, using the -S command-line option or theDBA_SCHEMA_LIST environment variable.


The primary schema in a multi-schema join must have select access to the

secondary schema’s tables. Use the RIS GRANT command to grant selectaccess.

2.6.2 Outer Joins

The Join Columns dialog lets you specify whether or not a join should be an outer join (asopposed to a standard join).

If you select Yes, the resulting universe includes all occurrences from the primary tablewhether or not it has a corresponding row in the secondary (join) table.

If you select No, the resulting universe includes only those occurrences for which thejoin column values are equal (for example, parts.part_num = sale.part_num).

In general, outer joins process faster than standard joins across schemas. Standard joinsprocess faster if the tables are in the same schema. Query criteria for the secondary tableare ignored for outer joins, but used for standard joins.

2.7 Edit Relations

The Edit Relations dialog (available from Schema Edit) lets the Database Administratorgraphically depict relations between tables in the database and store this information in aDBA template library. Once a relations template has been created and attached to adialog/report from the Edit Dialog or Edit Report dialogs, the dialog/report designer canplace columns from joined tables without being aware of the complexity of the database.

Relations can be simple, as in previous versions with the Join Columns dialog, or complex,consisting of several tables and multiple columns to each table join. DBA can find theshortest available route between tables when performing runtime join operations. If norelations template is attached, or if no path exists between the tables to be joined, the JoinColumns dialog is displayed the first time a join is specified. Existing dialogs/reports willwork as before without change. In fact, the relations template is ignored unless the JoinColumns dialog for the joined column is blank.

DBA 5.0 Edit Relations does not support multi-schema joins or outer joins. However, theJoin Columns dialog can be used to specify simple multi-schema joins and outer joins, as inpast versions.


The following commands are available from the Edit Relations dialog:

Template — The name of the relations template.

Description — The description of the relations template.

Load Relations — Displays the Load from Library dialog for loading an existingrelations template.

Save Relations — Displays the Save Template dialog for saving a new or changedrelations template.

Add Join — Displays the Join Columns dialog for adding new joins.

Delete Join — Deletes a join, by selecting the connecting line between the joincolumns.

Move Table — Aligns the table fields as wanted (added joins are placedautomatically).

Delete Table —Deletes a table and all associated joins.

Application Builder 3 - 1

Application Builder__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3 - 2 Application Builder


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________3.

Application Builder

DB Access provides Windows users with the tools necessary to build an application with thetrue Windows look-and-feel (LAF). The Application Builder lets you define and edit abasic application, and the VI API lets you to modify the application at runtime. See the DBAProgrammer’s Guide or on-line script help from the Edit Script dialog for a description ofthe VI API.

3.1 Application Components

A Windows LAF application can consist of the following components:

A main application window (like the File Manager).

Optional pulldown menus, with commands and cascading palettes.

An optional toolbar.

An optional status bar.

The DB Access Application Builder lets you load default or blank components of each variety,and attach scripts as needed to each component. The builder allows specification of thefollowing parameters:

Main Application Window

Name and description.

Title, collapse icon, and cursor bitmap.

Initial size and location.

Initial script and notify script.

Pulldown menus, toolbars, and status bars.

Windows border icons (maximize, minimize, horizontal/vertical scroll bars, systemmenu, Multi Document Interface (MDI) client.


Pulldown Menus

Palettes and their commands.

Palette script.

Initial command settings (checked, enabled).

Command scripts.

Toolbars

Toolbar script.

Gadgets (buttons, fields).

Gadget scripts.

Status Bars

Fields.

Dialog Boxes

All I/Forms for Windows gadgets, plus I/Forms for Windows extensions.

Dialog script.

Gadget scripts.

Modal as opposed to.

3.2 Programming a Windows Application

Applications can be coded in a combination of native C and scripting languages. They cancall DM/DB Access, VI, I/Forms for Windows functions or functions in any DLL, from eitherlanguage. Generally it is best to use scripting hooks to native code in DLLs for compute-intensive functionality. Scripts should be used more extensively when end-usercustomizability is desired.

The script engine is optional when using the development platform. The application caninstead register its own notification function (similar to I/Forms for Windows) to handle allDM/DB Access windows input.


3.2.1 Visual Interface API

The Visual Interface (VI) API supports the processing of applications and scripts, controls theappearance of pulldown menus, toolbars, and status bar, and handle the dynamic loading ofDLLs.

If the application prefers to use the Windows API, functions are available that returnhandles to menus, instances, MDI clients, and windows.

All display functions load templates, if they are not already loaded, from libraries using thestandard DM/DBA library search sequence. The library list lets applications easily plug inreplacement modules based on runtime conditions at any level. (For example, a runtimereplacement of a single menu palette on a pulldown menu, or a single dialog box, or a singlescript.)

For a complete description of the VI API, see the DB Access Programmer’s Guide or onlinescript help from the Edit Script dialog.

3.3 Handling Events

DM/DB Access offers several levels of event handling by using scripts and the user-registerednotification function. Scripts at each level (gadgets, components, and application) areoptional, but you must either supply a script or call VI_register_user_notify() to handle userinput.

DM/DB Access processes events in the following order:

1. Call the application script.

2. Call the gadget script.

3. Call the component (palette, toolbar, or dialog box) script.

4. Call the user notify function.

3.4 Accessing the Application Builder

To access the Application Builder, click on the first icon on the Toolbar.


Use the File pulldown menu to select Open, New Default, or New Blank.

Open

The Open command lets you load any application component for editing or processing.


New Default

The New Default command gives you a choice of a new application component with defaultcomponents.

New Blank

The New Default command gives you a choice of a new empty application component.


Creating a Palette

Select the File pulldown menu and select New Blank, then Palette and the Edit Palettedialog appeara.

Double click on the dialog and the Palettes dialog appears.

Name — Name of the palette.

Description — Description of the palette.


Title — Title of the palette. The title appears on the menu bar, or on the parentpalette if this is a cascading palette.

Palette Script — The name of the script is invoked each time you choose a commandfrom the palette.

Initial Script — The name of the script is invoked each time the palette is displayed.

Commands — The lists of the commands that make up the palette.

— Up — Moves the current command up one position in the list.

— Down — Moves the current command down one position in the list.

— Reset — Clears the current command; so that subsequent adds go to the bottom ofthe list.

— Drop — Delete the current command.

— Edit — Edit/view the parameters of the current command.

— Add — Adds a new command above the current command, or at the bottom of thelist if there is no current command.

Creating a Toolbar

Select the File pulldown menu and select New Blank, then Toolbar and the Toolbardialog appears.


Double click on the dialog and the Toolbar dialog appears.

Name — The name of the toolbar.

Description — The description of the toolbar.

Height — The height of the toolbar.

Script — The name of the script is invoked each time a button on the toolbar isselected.

Creating a Status bar

Select the File pulldown menu and select New Blank, then Status bar and the Status bardialog appears.


Double click on the dialog and the Status bar dialog appears.

Name — The name of the status bar.

Description — The description of the status bar.

Typeface — The typeface that you choose for the status bar fields.

Size — The body size that you choose for the staus bar fields.

Bold — A check box determining whether the status bar text is bolded.

Italic — A check box determining whether the status bar text is italicized.

Height — The height of the status bar.

Percentages — The percentage of the total each status bar field occupies. Thesenumbers must total 100.


Creating a Application

Select the File pulldown menu and select New Blank, then Application and the Blankdialog appears.

Double click on the dialog and the Application Styles dialog appears.

Name — The name of the application.

Description — The description of the application.

Title — The title of the application. This text appears on the title bar.

Toolbar — The toolbar to be attached to the application.


Statusbar — The name of the status bar to be attached to the application.

Initial Script — A script that is invoked whenever the application runs (using the -acommand line option or calling VIapp_display.)

Close Script — A script that is invoked when the application is closed.

Minimize — A check box that determines whether the application has a minimizecontrol.

Maximize — A check box that determines whether the application has a maximizecontrol.

Vertical Scrollbar — A check box that determines whether the application has avertical scroll bar, so that the client region can be scrolled vertically.

Horizontal Scrollbar — A check box that determines whether the application has avertical scroll bar, so that the client region can be scrolled horizontally.

Control Menu — A check box that determines whether the application has a controlmenu, so that common window commands can be accessed.

X Origin — This value can be keyed in, or the window will automatically.

Y Origin — This value can be keyed in, or the window will automatically.

Width — This value can be dragged or resized to the desired location or size.

Height — This value can be dragged or resized to the desired location or size.

Menus — A list of menu bar palettes for the current application. When new palettesare selected, they are added above the current palette, or at the bottom of the list.

Dialogs 4 - 1

Dialogs__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4 - 2 Dialogs

Dialogs 4 - 3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________4.

Dialogs

A dialog consists of gadgets placed on a form. A gadget is any field, button, text, and so onthat you can place on a dialog. Most of the gadgets that you can place using the DialogBuilder are found on the Database Edit dialog. If you have used Database Edit, you arefamiliar with the types of gadgets you can use to design your own dialogs.


4.1 Dialog Types

4.2 Dialog Design Considerations

4.3 Dialog Scripts

4.4 Accessing the Dialog Builder

4.5 Processing Dialogs

4.1 Dialog Types

The Dialog Builder provides several options for loading and customizing dialogs. You canselect a default dialog, which has the functionality of the Database Edit dialog, or a blankdialog.

The dialog loaded can be a Database dialog (associated with a specific schema.tablecombination) or a No Database dialog. A No Database dialog can be processed on anytable or can have no database functionality such as a main dialog.

4.1.1 Default Dialogs

The New Default command in the Dialog Builder creates a dialog with the functionality ofthe Database Edit dialog. The following is a default dialog.

4 - 4 Dialogs

The following sections list the default dialog gadgets. You can place these gadgets, as well asothers not available on a default dialog, by selecting Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) fromthe Dialog Builder panel dialog. Then select the appropriate command group button(Database Utilities, Graphic Utilities, General Utilities, or Cosmetic Graphics). Formore information see the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder).

4.1.1.1 Database Utilities Gadgets

The following Database Utilities gadgets are placed on a default dialog.

If the gadget is part of a command sub-group, the sub-group is listed inparentheses. For example, to place a multiple column field, you must selectPlace Gadget, Database Utilities (the command group), Column (thecommand sub-group), and Multiple Column.

Schema SelectTable Select

Current Row Text (Current Row)Multiple Column (Column)

Dialogs 4 - 5

Current Row Slider (Current Row)Previous Row (Current Row)Next Row (Current Row)Pick Row (Current Row)Initialize Query (Query)Edit Query (Query)Process Query (Query)Add Query (Override Key-in Mode)AND/OR Toggle (Query)Relational Operator (Query)Change All (Override Key-in Mode)

Change Row (Override Key-in Mode)Delete All (Delete)Delete Row (Delete)Review (Report)Insert RowSingle Report (Report)Update Active (Override Key-in Mode)Edit CodeFields On/OffUpdate RowRestore Defaults

4.1.1.2 Graphic Utilities

The following Graphic Utilities gadgets are placed on a default dialog.

Review ElementLocate GraphicsAttach DB LinkageLinkage Mode

Attach DAP LinkRemove LinkageRemove Fence

4.1.1.3 General Utilities

The Cancel button from the General Utilities command group is placed on a defaultdialog.

4.1.2 Blank Dialogs

The Load Blank command in the Dialog Builder creates a blank dialog.

4 - 6 Dialogs

The following General Utilities gadgets are included on a blank dialog:

OK buttonCancel button

Do not delete the Cancel button, unless you replace it with another Cancel orExit button. If you process a dialog that has no Cancel or Exit button, there isno way to dismiss the dialog.

4.2 Dialog Design Considerations

Before you create a custom dialog you should consider how the dialog will be used. Do youneed:

Access to one database or several databases, one table or several tables? Should accessto certain columns be restricted?

Read-only or read/write access to the databases? Should you be able to delete, insert, orchange rows?

To generate reports or review a listing of the data?

Access to information from more than one table at the same time?

To execute CLIX or MicroStation commands from the dialog?

To create and/or manipulate linkages between graphics files and databases?

A default dialog is a good starting point for building a custom dialog. You can edit gadgets,delete unneeded gadgets, and place new gadgets to give the dialog the functionality required.You can also build a custom dialog from a blank dialog or load an existing dialog from atemplate library.

4.3 Dialog Scripts

You can further customize any dialog by associating the dialog or a gadget on that dialogwith a script. Scripts are C-like statements that can call DB Access, standard C, I/Forms,I/NFM, or RIS functions. Although standard Dialog Builder commands meet most dialogcreation needs, scripting provides a greater level of flexibility and control.

You can:

Create, edit, and test scripts, then save them to a template library through the EditScript command.

Specify a script to execute whenever a dialog is invoked (using the Dialog Scriptoption) or notified (using the Notify Script option) through the Edit DialogParameters command.

Dialogs 4 - 7

Specify scripts to execute before and/or after a gadget is processed through the GadgetCharacteristics command.

Place a gadget associated with a specific script through the Script command.

4.4 Accessing the Dialog Builder

To access the Dialog Builder, click on the second icon on the Toolbar menu.

The DBA Dialog Builder Toolbox appears on the screen, which can be moved orminimized.

4 - 8 Dialogs

4.4.1 Dialog Builder Toolbox

When you access the Dialog Builder, the following Toolbox appears.

Text Box — This command places a Text Box button on the current dialog, fortext entry/display.

Multi-Column Field — This command places a Multi-Column Field button onthe current dialog, for multi-column text entry/selection/display.

List Box — This command places a List Box button on the current dialog, fortext selection.

Grid — This command places a Grid on the current dialog, for multi-column textselection.

Combo Box — This command places a Combo Box on the current dialog.

Field Plus — This command places a Field Plus on the current dialog. A FieldPlus gadget is a custom control that offers full I/Forms functionality.

Check Box/Radio Button — This command places a Checklist Box or RadioButton on the current dialog, to display parameter states (on/off).

Dialogs 4 - 9

Button — This command places a text, bitmap or symbol button.

Symbol — This command places a Symbol or Bitmap on the current dialog.

Scrollbar — This command places a Scrollbar that can display a range ofvalues. You can use scripts to define the function or read the value of thescrollbar.

Slider — This command places a Slider that can display a range of values. Youcan use scripts to define the function or read the value of the slider.

Text — This command places Text annotation on the current dialog.

Group Box — This command places a Group Box on the current dialog to groupa set of like-functioned gadgets.

Spin Box — This command places a Spin Box on the current dialog for cyclingthrough a range of values.

Rectangle — This command places a Rectangle on the current dialog. You canselect line weight, and line style.

Line — This command places a Line which the user can change the line weightand/or line style.

Gauge — This command places a Gauge that can display a percentage (from 1 to100).

Dial — This command places a Dial that can display a range of values.

4.5 Processing Dialogs

You can access the Process Dialog command from the Dialogs area of the DB Access maindialog or from the Dialog Builder bar menu. This command lets you test gadgets on thecurrent dialog to see if they are working properly. See the section Process Dialog.

4 - 10 Dialogs

Reports 5 - 1

Reports__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

5 - 2 Reports

Reports 5 - 3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________5.

Reports

DB Access lets you create, load, modify, and save report templates. You can specify thelayout of different types of lines and fields within the report template. When the template isprocessed, DB Access reads information from a relational database, ASCII file, binary file, orelement list file and formats it to your specifications.


5.1 Report Types

5.2 Accessing the Report Builder

5.3 Processing Reports

5.1 Report Types

The Report Builder provides several options for creating reports. You can define templates toreport on database tables, ASCII files, binary files, or user data in design files. Blank anddefault reports are available for all four report types. The four report types are:

Database reports — Loads a default template, a blank template, or an existingtemplate from a template library.

ASCII reports — Creates an ASCII structure template or loads an existing ASCIIreport template from a template library. See the section Define Structure.

Binary reports — Creates a binary structure template or loads an existing binaryreport template from a template library. See the section Define Structure.

User data reports — Creates a user data structure template or loads an existing userdata report template from a template library. See the section Define Structure.

5.1.1 Default Reports

The New Default (Report Builder) command reads the structure of the attached databaseor structure and generates a default report template for the selected table. You can selectcolumns to be included in or excluded from the default template when it is loaded.

The following is the default report template for the manufacturer table in the sampledatabase.

5 - 4 Reports

In a report template, the column on the left indicates the line type. Arepresents alphanumeric data, I represents integer data, F represents floating-point data, D represents derived field, and C represents a coded column field.The number of As, Is, Fs, Ds, or Cs represents the field length for the column inthe database.

A default template has the following characteristics:

Sort criteria

— One sort key (the first selected column of the table)

Top lines

— Title line (the table name)

– Date, Time, and Page line

– Column Header lines (underlined column names)

Body lines

— Detail line. Printed once for each row in the input universe, it contains the selectedcolumns. You can specify 1 to 2000 characters per line for the default report on theEdit Report Parameters dialog. If the selected columns overrun the currentcharacters per line, the line is extended to fit all selected columns.

In addition, the line contains a counter field which counts rows and resets when sortkey 1 breaks or changes.

Reports 5 - 5

— Subtotal line. Printed when sort key 1 breaks; it totals, prints, and resets the

counter field and totals, prints, and resets any numeric columns included in thereport.

Final line

— The system totals and prints the counter field, and totals and prints any numericcolumns included in the report in this line.

For more information, see the section New Default (Report Builder).

5.1.2 Blank Reports

The New Blank (Report Builder) command loads a blank report template for a selectedtable. Unrelated Tables loads a blank template that lets you report on tables that have norelationship.

A blank report contains no lines or fields. You can design a template with the features andfunctionality needed.

5.1.2.1 Unrelated Tables Reports

To report on tables that do not share join columns, you must create an unrelated tablesreport. Possible reports on unrelated tables include reports in which preface informationcomes from one table and body information from another.

You must place one or more Single Table lines for each table on the report template. Fieldsfor a table must be placed on a line associated with that table. Common lines, such as pageheadings, are placed on All Tables lines. You must set up separate sorts for each table in thereport.

5 - 6 Reports

For more information, see these sections Join Columns, New Blank (Report Builder), andModify Sort.

5.2 Accessing the Report Builder

To access the Report Builder, click on the third icon on the Toolbar dialog.

The Report Builder dialog displays on top of the DB Access main dialog.

DB Access loads the Report Builder menu bar.

5.3 Processing Reports

You can access the Process Report command from the Reports area of the DB Accessmain dialog. This command lets you process report templates that have been created in theReport Builder. For more information see section Process Reports.

Edit Script 6 - 1

Edit Script__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6 - 2 Edit Script

Edit Script 6 - 3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________6.

Edit Script

The Edit Script button on the DB Access main dialog calls the Edit Script dialog. TheEdit Script dialog lets you create or edit scripts. All major functions designed for runtimeusers can be manipulated by scripts. In addition, System commands can be included withinscripts.

Scripting assumes a knowledge of the C programming language. In fact, the structure of ascript is in the form of a C function. For descriptions of supported functions, see the DBAccess Programmer’s Guide or the c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\script.doc file.

Dialog Options

When you select Edit Script, the Edit Script dialog appears.

Name — Specifies the name of the script. The name of the script template must be thesame as the function name.

6 - 4 Edit Script

Description — Contains a description of the script (up to 50 characters).

Load from ASCII file — Specifies the name of an ASCII file to load. You can edit thefile and save it as a script.

Save to ASCII file — Specifies the name of an ASCII file to contain the current script.Scripts saved as ASCII files can be printed.

Debugger — A check box that determines whether the Script Debugger is off or on.When the toggle is set to On, a Debugger icon appears on the screen. For moreinformation, see the section Script Debugger.

Store Compiled Scripts — A check box that determines whether the compiled versionof the script is stored in the template library. When the toggle is set to On, thecompiled script is stored in the template library so that it does not have to berecompiled each time the application is invoked. When the toggle is set to Off, thescript is not stored in the template library and is recompiled each time the applicationis invoked.

Load Script — Calls the Load from Library dialog. You can select a script from thelist of available script templates. For more information, see the section Load FromLibrary.

Check Script — Displays a Script Errors form that displays any detected errors andthe line numbers where the errors were detected. (Usually an error is detectedsomewhere just after it occurs.) If you select an error line in the Script Errors form,the cursor moves to the point in the script (on the Edit Script dialog) where the errorwas detected.

Save Script — Calls the Save Template dialog. You can save the current script as atemplate in the current template library. For more information, see the section SaveOptions.

Options — Calls the Script Options dialog, which is described in the followingsection.

Text field — Displays the current script. When the Edit Script dialog first appears,this field is in edit mode. You can key in a script or edit one that has been loaded.

Clear — Clears the text field on the Edit Script dialog. It also clears the deletebuffer.

Delete — Puts the text field in delete mode; any script statement you select is deletedand stored in a delete buffer. The delete buffer stores deleted lines until you exit deletemode or select Clear. Select Delete again to exit delete mode.

Undelete — Inserts the current delete buffer at the marker (highlighted) line in thetext field. If no marker line exists, the delete buffer is inserted at the bottom of thetext.

Edit Script 6 - 5

Select a line to make it a marker line. The text field cannot be in delete or edit mode.(That is, the Delete, Undelete, and Edit buttons are not depressed.)

Edit — This button places the text field in edit mode. You can key in or edit scripts.

Use Editor — This button invokes the preferred editor (defined by the EDITORenvironment variable). If EDITOR is not defined, Notepad is the default editor.

— The name of the current editor appears in the field to the right of the Use Editorbutton. To change editors, select and clear this field, and key in the name of thenew editor.

Options Button

When you select the Script Options button, the Script Options dialog appears.

Run Current Script — This button runs the current script in the editor and acceptsany arguments. Some scripts, such as one that requires input from a dialog, cannot runwith this command. The Arguments field is used to place any literal arguments thatnormally appear inside the parentheses of a function call. Separate the literalarguments with commas, but do not key in the parentheses.

Delete Globals — This button deletes all global variables from memory. This is usefulif you need to change a global type.

Run Initial Script — By default, this button runs the script specified byDBA_INITIAL_SCRIPT. You can specify another script in the Initial Script field.(Initial scripts can be used to initialize global variables and require no arguments.)This button also deletes all global variables.

Verbose Errors and Warnings — The gadgets in this area let you manipulateverbose error checking mode. Use of this mode eliminates the need to check statusreturns in script function calls.

6 - 6 Edit Script

— Edit Settings. This button calls the Verbose Error Settings dialog, which lets

you select which function types undergo verbose error checking (standard C, DBAccess, I/Forms, I/NFM, RIS, or all). These settings can be saved and loaded asdesign options. For more information see the section Save Options.

— Off/On. This toggle turns verbose error checking mode off or on.

Script Debugger

The Script Debugger is a troubleshooting tool for scripts. You can use the Script Debuggerto:

Set breakpoints to stop a script at specified points in processing.

Review the variables associated with a script.

Set values for these variables.

Set verbose error checking mode options.

Return to the Edit Script dialog.

Script Debugger Dialog Options

The Script Debugger dialog is invoked from the Edit Script dialog. When you set theDebugger toggle to On, a Debugger icon appears on the screen. You can move the icon bypressing and holding the mouse button and moving the mouse.

When any dialogs associated with the Script Debugger are collapsed, aDebugger icon appears on the screen.

Select the icon to uncollapse the Script Debugger dialog.

Edit Script 6 - 7

Edit Script — This button returns you to the Edit Script dialog. The last scriptfunction displayed in the Script Debugger text field appears in the Edit Script textfield.

Single Step — This button steps to the next line of the script code being debugged.Any function called is executed.

Step Into — When a script calls a user-defined script function, this button displays thecalled function. Execution stops on the first line of the called function. Step Into actsas a single step on button functions and dynamically loaded functions.

Breakpoints — This button calls the Set/Review Breakpoints dialog. For moreinformation, see the section Set/Review Breakpoints.

Go — This button runs the script to completion or to the next breakpoint.

Continue — This button runs the current function to completion. Execution stops onthe line of script following the point where the function is called.

Variables — This button calls the Review Variables dialog. For more information,see the section Review Variables.

Abort — This button stops execution of the current script and any other gadgetprocessing which is pending.

6 - 8 Edit Script

Visual Script Trace — This toggle turns the Visual Script Trace on and off. Whenthe toggle is On, the debugger displays functions as they are called, highlighting theline being executed.

Break on Script Gadget — This toggle sets the Break on Script switch. When thetoggle is On and a gadget (or report line, dialog script, or notify script) that has anassociated script is activated, the debugger becomes uncollapsed. Script processing issuspended just as if a breakpoint had been set.

Verbose Errors and Warnings — The gadgets in this area let you manipulateverbose error checking mode. Use of this mode eliminates the need to check statusreturns in script function calls.

— Edit Settings. This button calls the Verbose Error Settings dialog, which letsyou select which function types undergo verbose error checking (standard C, DBAccess, I/Forms, I/NFM, RIS, or all). These settings can be saved and loaded asdesign options (see the section Save Options).


Breakpoints — This toggle turns all breakpoints on (Enabled) or off (Disabled)without calling the Set/Review Breakpoints dialog. This does not affect theautomatic break on gadget/line scripts.

Name — This field specifies the script function being debugged.

Description — This field contains a description of the script function.

Edit Script 6 - 9

Set/Review Breakpoints

When you select Breakpoints from the Script Debugger dialog, the Set/ReviewBreakpoints dialog appears.

Break on Function — This field displays the script templates available from thecurrent library. You can select functions from this list. Script processing stops when aselected function is called.

Clear All Breakpoints — This button clears all functions and line breakpoints.

Undo Changes — This button resets all breakpoints to the way they were when theSet/Review Breakpoints dialog was invoked.

Function — This field specifies which function’s line breakpoints appear in the Breakon Line field. You can key in a function or select one using the list indicator.

Edit Line Breakpoints — This button starts Add/Remove Line Breakpoints mode.In this mode, you can select lines displayed in the Script Debugger dialog text field toadd them as line breakpoints (displayed in the Break on Line field). You can removethe line breakpoint by deselecting the line (that is, selecting the line a second time) onthe Script Debugger dialog.

Delete Line Breakpoints — This button removes line breakpoints from lines in theBreak on Line field. Select Delete Line Breakpoints. Then select the lines toremove breakpoints.

6 - 10 Edit Script

Break on Line — This field specifies the lines of a function on which the ScriptDebugger stops processing.

Review Variables

When you select Variables from the Script Debugger dialog, the Review Variablesdialog appears.

Function — This field specifies which function’s variables are currently displayed.You can key in a function or select one using the list indicator.

Name — This field specifies the name of the variable.

Type — This field gives the type of the variable, its level of indirection, if its an arrayand the numbers and sizes of dimensions.

Value — This field specifies the value of the variable.

Most pointers are displayed as two integers separated by a colon. Some pointers, suchas dba_errtxt, appear as a single integer.

To change a variable’s value, position the cursor on the value to be changed and key ina new value.

Template Librarian 7 - 1

Template Librarian__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

7 - 2 Template Librarian


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________7.

Template Librarian

The Template Librarian (templib) is a standalone utility. It is an integrated part of theadministrator which provides many of the features of templib, DB Access template libraries.You can use the Template Librarian to:

List the templates in a specified template library.

Copy templates from one template library to another.

Extract a template into a text file (only available from templib).

Delete a template.

Compress a template library to recover space after templates have been replaced ordeleted.

The Template Librarian is an embedded DBA application. Most of the codebehind it are scripts. These dialogs and scripts can be customized and added toby the user.

Accessing the Template Librarian

To access the Template Librarian, click on the fifth icon on the Toolbar dialog.


The Template Librarian screen appears.

Before you can copy, delete, or move libraries, you must select the libraries necessary for theoperation. To select one library, just click on it. To select more than one, hold the Ctrl keydown when using the mouse.

Copy Libraries

To copy a library select Template and then select Copy from the pulldown menu.

When Copy is selected the Copy dialog appears.


Copy selected templates to — The name of the library to copy to. If it does not exist,you are prompted to create it.

Browse — The Browse button can be used to activate the standard Open dialog tosearch for the library to copy to.

Replace templates —The Replace templates option must be checked for a DBAexisting template to be overwritten.

Move Libraries

To move a library select Template and then select Move from the pulldown menu.

When Move is selected the Move dialog appears.

Move selected templates to — The name of the library to move to. If it does notexist, you are prompted to create it.

Browse — The Browse button can be used to activate the standard Open dialog tosearch for the library to move to.

Replace templates —The Replace templates option must be checked for a DBAexisting template to be overwritten.


Delete

When you select Template, then Delete, a confirmation dialog box displays.

Undelete

To retrieve previous versions of a template or recover a template that has been deleted, youfirst have to see the deleted/modified templates. Then choose the templates to undelete.(The Undelete command is disabled until this point). Select Undelete, the template ismoved from the Deleted list and becomes visible again when you do another Show Deleted(to turn the mode off). If there is already a nondeleted template in the library with the samename and type, it becomes deleted (they are basically swapped).

All deleted templates are permanently removed (and do not show up in thedeleted list) if a Compress is performed on the template library.

Select All

When you select Template, then Select All, the template librarian marks everything in theCurrent List of Templates.


Unselect All

When you select Template, then Unselect All, the template librarian undoes the SelectAll command.

Template Types

To see the template types, select View and then select Template Type from the pulldownmenu.


When you select Template Types, the Template Types Filter dialog appears.

This is used to control what types of templates are shown in the Template List.

Sort By

To sort a library select View and then select Sort By from the pulldown menu.

When the Sort By is selected the Sort By dialog appears.


Show Deleted

To look at the deleted templates, select View and then select Show Deleted from thepulldown menu.

When you select Show Deleted, a list of deleted templates dialog appears.

Compress

To compress the library, select Tools and then select Compress from the pulldown menu.


This command only affects the current library.

This permanently removes any deleted templates.

Bulk Compile

To do a bulk script compile, select Tools and then select Bulk Compile from the pulldownmenu.

When you select Bulk Compile, the Bulk Script Compiler dialog appears.

This compiles all script templates in all the libraries in the DBA_LIB_LIST into stored scriptobjects. For information see the section Store Compiled Scripts and Object libraries. If anyof the scripts do not compile, use the Review Errors button to view any errors.


Cross Reference

To generate a cross reference report, select Tools and then select Cross Reference from thepulldown menu.

When you select Cross Reference, the Cross Reference dialog appears.

Object Template Library — This field has the library name that is created in thebulk script compile command.

Report Output Filename — This is what the report file is named.

Report Description — This field gives you a description of the report to be run.

A cross reference report is really a DBA ASCII Report. You can choose which cross referenceyou want to generate:

FUNCTION_REF — Lists each function and indicates which scripts call it.

FUNC_SYMBOL_DUMP — Lists each function, along with all automatic variables,and global variables for each function name.


GLOBAL_REF — Lists each global variable and indicates which scripts referencethem.

INCLUDE_REF — Lists each include file/include template and which scripts includethem.

All these reports can be customized and new ones added. For more informationsee the file c:\win32app\ingr\dba\support\tl.tlb.

Bitmap Loader 8 - 1

Bitmap Loader__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 2 Bitmap Loader

Bitmap Loader 8 - 3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________8.

Bitmap Loader

The Bitmap Loader utility allows standard.bmp images to be loaded from the disk andstored in your Template Library.

Accessing the Bitmap Loader

To access the Bitmap utility, click on the sixth icon on the Toolbar menu.

The Bitmap Loader screen appears.

Name — Template name to be created.

Filename — Full path of the .bmp file (or select Browse.)

Description — Template description.

Apply — Loads the .bmp file specified by the current filename for saving.

8 - 4 Bitmap Loader

Cancel — Exits the Bitmap Loader.

Browse — Displays the Open File dialog for selecting .bmp files.

Save — Saves the current bitmap into the template library (Apply is required first.)

The following steps need to be follow when using the Bitmap Loader:

1. Key in filename of .bmp file or Browse.

2. Apply to view bitmap.

3. Save to template library as desired.

— OR —

Select Bitmap templates from load from library dialog for viewing.

Once bitmaps have been added to the template library, they can be placed on toolbars anddialogs.

Database Edit 9 - 1

Database Edit__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

9 - 2 Database Edit

Database Edit 9 - 3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________9.

Database Edit

The Database Edit function lets you review, add, delete, or modify rows in an attachedrelational database. You can manipulate individual rows or a universe of rows. You canprocess report templates from Database Edit.


9.1 Accessing Database Edit

9.2 Creating and Using Query Criteria

9.3 Editing Database Values

9.1 Accessing Database Edit

When you select Utilities from the DB Access menu bar, the pulldown menu appears.Select the Database Edit command and the Database Edit dialog appears. If a schemaand table are active, the column list for the table is displayed. If there is not a schemapresent enter one in the schema field and press the Return key. The schema is attached,and you can select a table in the table field.

9 - 4 Database Edit

Initialize Query — This button initializes (clears) the current query criteria. Formore information, see sections Creating and Using Query Criteria and Initialize Query(Database Edit).

Edit Query — This button lets you edit or save the current query criteria, or load aquery criteria template from a template library. For more information, see sectionsCreating and Using Query Criteria and Edit Query (Database Edit).

Process Query — This button finds all rows in the current table that meet the querycriteria. If no query criteria exists, Process Query returns all rows in the currenttable. For more information see sections, Creating and Using Query Criteria andProcess Query (Database Edit).

Current Row — This area lets you determine which row in the universe is current.For more information, see the section Current Row (Database Edit).

Add Query — This area is used to set up query criteria, values used to search thedatabase for rows with common information. For more information, see sectionsCreating and Using Query Criteria and Add Query (Database Edit).

Edit Code — This button lets you display, edit, and insert new code list values in acode list. You can also add a code list value to the current row. For more information,see sections DB Access Reserved Tables.

Restore Defaults — This button restores the default values of the displayed columns.It erases the display of the current row. For more information, see the section RestoreDefaults (Database Edit).

Change All — This button lets you change the value for one or more columns for allrows in the current universe. For more information, see sections Editing DatabaseValues and Change All (Database Edit).

Delete All — This button deletes all rows in the current universe from the databaseupon verification. For more information, see the section Delete All (Database Edit).

Fields On/Off — This button toggles all column fields off or on. Off fields are notincluded in universe reviews. You can toggle individual fields on or off by selecting thecolumn name for the field on the Database Edit dialog. For more information, see thesection Fields On/Off (Database Edit).

Review — This button generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the currentuniverse. For more information, see the section Review (Database Edit).

Report — This button calls the Process Reports dialog, which lets you load andprocess a report template. You can list the report output to the screen or print theoutput file. For more information, see the section Report (Database Edit).

Key Column — This button puts the dialog in key column mode, which overrides thekey-in mode for database fields. For more information, see the section Key Column(Database Edit).

Database Edit 9 - 5

Change Row — This button puts the dialog in change row mode, which overrides thekey-in mode for key column, add query, and update active fields. For more information,see sections Editing Database Values and Change Row (Database Edit).

Delete Row — This button deletes the current row from the database uponverification. For more information, see the section Delete Row (Database Edit).

Update Active — This button lets you enter data in the multiple column field which isused in creating a new row. Select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row inthe database. For more information, see the section Update Active (Database Edit).

Insert Row — This button inserts a new row in the database, based on the currentlydisplayed column values. You can select Update Active, enter the column values youwant for a row, and select Insert Row to create the new row. For more information,see sections Insert Row (Database Edit) and Update Active (Database Edit).

Update Row — This button updates the current row based on the currently displayedcolumns values. For more information, see the section Update Row (Database Edit).

9.2 Creating and Using Query Criteria

Database Edit lets you build query criteria to search a database table for rows with commoncolumn values. For example, you might want to search the parts table for all tires made by aparticular manufacturer, or all tires of a certain size and price range. The set of rows thatmatch the query criteria is called a universe of rows.

9.2.1 Using Query Functions

The following is a suggested sequence for clearing, creating, and processing query criteria.In this example, the parts table is current. This example creates query criteria to search for15-inch tires with a price of less than 100 dollars by:

Using a substring search (!!) relational operator for the mfr_name field to limit thequery to manufacturers of tires. The two manufacturers in the database that producetires (GoodTire and Armstrong Tires) have the character string Tire in their names.

Using a substring search relational operator for the description1 field to limit the size ofthe tires to 15.

Using the less than ( < ) relational operator for the price field to search for tires thatcost less than 100 dollars.

Selecting the AND function to find only the tires that meet all the criteria.

9 - 6 Database Edit

Operating Sequence

1. Select Initialize Query from the Database Edit dialog to clear any existing querycriteria.

The message Query initialized appears.

2. Create a query criteria.

a. Select Add Query.

The Add Query button appears to be depressed. The dialog is in Add Query mode.Any edits to the column values of the current row are added as query criteria anddo not change the database.

b. Set the AND/OR toggle to AND.

c. Select the list indicator on the relational operators field. Select the substringsearch ( !! ) operator from the displayed list.

d. Select the mfr_name column field. Clear the column field and key in Tire .

The message Query added appears.

3. Repeat the process to add a substring search for 15 in the description1 field.

4. Add query criteria in the price field for less than ( < ) 100. (This requires you to select anew relational operator.)

5. Select Edit Query to review the query criteria.

The Edit Query dialog displays the query criteria. The query criteria should resemblethe following:

a. If there are errors in the query criteria, select the appropriate line and make theneeded edits.

b. Select OK to accept the query criteria and to exit the Edit Query dialog.

Database Edit 9 - 7

6. Select Process Query to process the query criteria.

The system displays the message Found nn "parts" row(s) and displays the first row in theuniverse.

7. Use the Current Row functions to page through the universe, or select Review to seea formatted listing of the universe.

9.3 Editing Database Values

You can use Database Edit to change most column values in a database.

By default, the multiple column field on the Database Edit dialog is in change row mode.To update a value in the current row, select the appropriate column field and key in a newvalue. The row is automatically updated in the database.

Exceptions to this process include:

If a dialog contains add query, update active, or key column fields, you must selectChange Row to change the associated value. For more information, see the sectionChange Row (Database Edit).

You cannot edit a serial column value in an INFORMIX database by keying in a newvalue. You cannot use the Change Row command to change serial column values.

If you convert serial columns to integer columns, you should be able to modify theirvalues through DB Access.

You cannot enter duplicate values in a column used for unique row identification(mslink, mscatalog.key column, or unique index). For more information, see the sectionDB Access Reserved Tables.

To change one or more column values for all rows in the current universe, use theChange All command. For more information, see the section Change All (DatabaseEdit).

9 - 8 Database Edit

SQL Statements 10 - 1

SQL Statements__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

10 - 2 SQL Statements


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________10.

SQL Statements

The SQL Statements button on the DB Access main dialog calls the SQL Statementsdialog. You can enter and process SQL statements, and save them as templates. You canload SQL templates to process or edit. You can load an ASCII file to edit and process.

In general, you should use the SQL Statements dialog to process DataManipulation Language (DML) statements (such as delete, insert, select, andupdate). Use the RIS Schema Manager in the Schema Edit utility for functionsperformed by Data Definition Language (DDL) statements (such as create, alter,and drop).

The Structured Query Language (SQL) is an ANSI standard language for creating andmanipulating databases. For information on RIS-supported SQL statements, see theRelational Interface System (RIS) for Windows NT SQL User’s Guide.

Dialog Options

When you select SQL Statements, the SQL Statements dialog appears.

SQL Statement Field — This field specifies the current SQL statements. You can keyin one or more statements. You can break a statement over more than one line byinserting a Return between words. If there are multiple SQL statements, terminateeach statement with a semicolon (;).


A single SQL statement

Multiple SQL statements

Load ASCII — This field lets you specify an ASCII file to be loaded. The contents ofthe file displays in the SQL Statement field. You can edit the display, process it, orsave it as an SQL template.

Editor — This button invokes the preferred editor which is defined by the EDITORenvironment variable. If EDITOR is not defined, Notepad is the default editor.

— The name of the current editor appears in the field to the right of the Editor button.To change editors, select and clear this field, and key in the name of the new editor.

Load SQL — This button calls the Load from Library dialog. You can select atemplate from the list of available SQL templates. For more information, see thesection Load From Library.

Save SQL — This button calls the Save Template dialog. You can save the currentSQL statements as a template in a template library. For more information, see thesection Save Options.

Apply — This button executes the SQL statements. If you process an SQL selectstatement, the Database Edit dialog appears. Select Review to see a listing of theresulting universe, or select Process Query and use the Current Row functions tostep through the universe a row at a time.


Clear — This button clears the SQL Statement field.

Close — This button exits the SQL Statements.

Schema Edit 11 - 1

Schema Edit__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

11 - 2 Schema Edit

Schema Edit 11 - 3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________11.

Schema Edit

The Schema Edit on the DB Access menu bar gives a pulldown menu to choose the differentoptions. You can create, modify, and drop schemas or tables, and grant or revoke RISprivileges.

11.1 Accessing Schema Edit

When you select Utilities from the DB Access menu bar, the pulldown menu appears.

RIS Schema Manager — This button calls the RIS Schema Manager. You can create,review, and manipulate schemas and tables, and review and manipulate the schemafile. For more information, see the section RIS Schema Manager.

Create/Alter Table — This button lets you create a new table or alter an existing one.For more information, see the section Create/Alter Table (Schema Edit).

Drop Table — This button lets you drop a table definition from the specified schema.For more information, see the section Drop Table (Schema Edit).

Build Schema List — This button lets you build a list of schemas for use withmultiple-schema dialogs and reports. For more information, see the section BuildSchema List (Schema Edit).

Edit Relations — This button lets you graphically depict relations between the tablesin your database. For more information, see the section Edit Relations.

Edit Privileges — This button lets you grant or revoke table privileges for anyavailable RIS schemas. For more information, see the section Edit Privileges (SchemaEdit).

11 - 4 Schema Edit

DB Access Graphics 12 - 1

DB Access Graphics__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

12 - 2 DB Access Graphics


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________12.

DB Access Graphics

DB Access provides two methods for working in graphics.

Vector graphics — Use MicroStation design files.

Raster graphics — All DM/View file formats are supported.


12.1 DB Access Graphics Linkages.

12.2 Database Edit Graphics Linkages Functions.

12.3 DB Access/MicroStation Vector Graphics.

12.4 DB Access Raster Graphics.

12.1 DB Access Graphics Linkages

DB Access lets you link rows in a database to elements in design files and raster files. Inaddition, you can create linkages between a raster file element and a text file, or betweenelements in the same raster file or different raster files.

Database Linkages The Attach Linkage command links the currentdatabase row to an element in a design file or rasterfile. For more information, see these sections DatabaseEdit Graphics Linkages Functions and Attach DBLinkage (Database Edit).

Attach DAP Link The Attach DAP Link command links the currentdatabase row with a text node in a design file. Formore information, see these sections Database EditGraphics Linkages Functions and Attach DAP Link(Database Edit).

12.2 Database Edit Graphics Linkages Functions

The Graphics Linkages buttons, on the lower right side of the Database Edit dialog, createand manipulate linkages in design or raster files. These buttons are enclosed by a dotted linein the following figure.


Review Element — This button reviews the linkages for a graphic element in a designor raster file. See the section Review Element (Database Edit).

Attach Linkage — This button creates a linkage that associates the current row witha graphic element in the design or raster file. See the section Attach DB Linkage(Database Edit).

Attach DAP Linkage — This button creates a linkage that associates the current rowwith a text node in the design file. This command works only in vector graphics. Seethe section Attach DAP Link (Database Edit).

Remove Linkage — This button lets you select a graphic element and remove anyexisting linkage. See the section Remove Linkage (Database Edit).

Remove Fence — This button lets you remove the linkages on any graphic elementscontained within a fence you place. See the section Remove Fence (Database Edit).

Locate Graphics — This button locates the graphic element that is linked to thecurrent row. If a linkage exists, DB Access locates the graphic element, centers it in thespecified window, and highlights it. See the section Locate Graphics (Database Edit).

Linkage Mode — This field specifies the type of linkage created with the AttachLinkage function. The values for a linkage are New, Existing, Info, and None. See thesection Attach DB Linkage (Database Edit).

Delete Row — This toggle determines if the database row associated with a graphicelement is deleted when the linkage is removed. See sections Remove Linkage(Database Edit) and Remove Fence (Database Edit).


12.3 DB Access/MicroStation Vector Graphics

DB Access lets you create and manipulate linkages between database rows and elements inMicroStation vector images.

Before linking database rows to graphics data in a MicroStation design file, you must createan mslink column for the tables containing those rows. The mslink column must have aunique value for each row. DB Access uses the mslink column to uniquely identify a row;MicroStation uses mslink to specify a database row that a graphics element is linked to.

You can automatically create the mslink column and insert unique mslinkvalues for each row with the Create/Alter Table function of the Schema Editutility. For more information, see the section Create/Alter Table (Schema Edit).

12.3.1 Accessing DB Access from a MicroStation Design File

Operating Sequence

1. Access the design file containing the elements for which you want to create ormanipulate graphics linkages. You can enter the design file through the MicroStationCommand Environment (mce <design.file> ) or through any graphics applicationbuilt on MicroStation.

2. Invoke DB Access. Key in the following MicroStation start command:

start c:\win32app\ingr\dba\dba.exe

The DB Access main dialog appears. DB Access attaches to the schema stored inDBA_SCHEMA or specified with the -s command-line option. If no schema is specified,the main dialog displays, but there is no current schema.

If necessary, specify a schema in the Schema field.

3. Select a table from the Select Table screen on the right side of the DB Access maindialog.

The table name highlights and is displayed in the Table field.

4. Select Database Edit.

The Database Edit dialog appears.


The graphics linkage buttons on the bottom right side of the dialog are active.

12.4 DB Access Raster Graphics

You can manipulate raster images in the DB Access environment. The raster files must belocal or NFS mounted. All Database Edit graphics linkages function except Attach DAPLinkage can be performed on raster files. In addition, DB Access provides commands thatare specific to raster graphics.

12.4.1 Workflow for Raster Graphics

Before you can manipulate raster images within DB Access, you must:

1. Create a control file in your working directory. The following is an example:

# This file is used to set up raster variables used by DB Access.# To for DB Access to use this file you need to:## export DBA_RASTER=/usr/ip32/dba/support/raster.ctl# or# set DBA_RASTER=c:\win32app\ingr\dba\support\raster.ctl## Each user can make a copy of this file to their own directory and modify# DBA_RASTER to point to their directory / file.## Also note that everything is case sensitive.


# Window origin

X1: 30Y1: 10

# Width and Height of window

Width: 400Height: 400

# "Windows" mode of how the graphics windows will be displayed.# Valid values are: CASCADE or QUADRANT

Windows: CASCADE

# The offset values are used only if you have set the variable Windows# to CASCADE

Offset_x: 10Offset_y: 10

# There is a little button menu that has some read only graphics functions# like Fit, Window Area, Zoom In etc... The menu is displayed by the# when the user types a "v".## There are three valid "Menu" commands:# PERMANENT# Once the raster command menu is displayed it will stay displayed until# the user hits the cancel button.# POP_UP# An soon as the user hits a button the menu will be erased.# NONE# The raster menu will not be displayed when the user hits the "v" key.

Menu: PERMANENT

# Highlight, Foreground, Background, File_Link_Color, Note_Link_Color,# User_Link_Color, and Database_Link_Color control the colors of the# window and the DBA Links.# The valid colors are:# LIGHT CYAN 0# DARK GRAY 1# BLACK 2# YELLOW 3# LIGHT GRAY 4# DARK CYAN 5# WHITE 6# LIGHT RED 7# LIGHT GREEN 8# LIGHT BLUE 9# BROWN 10# DARK RED 11# DARK GREEN 12# DARK BLUE 13# DARK MAGENTA 14# LIGHT MAGENTA 15

Highlight: 4Foreground: 2Background: 6File_Link_Color: 11Note_Link_Color: 9User_Link_Color: 3Database_Link_Color: 8


# If you want the DB Access database redlines/links to be displayed# every time the graphics image is repainted set Auto_Display_links to# "ON" the default value is "OFF"

Auto_Display_Links: OFF

# You can specify the type of text redline font that you want to use.# The font should be one that is available on the machine you are running on.

# Font: mono821b

# Files_Table, Links_Table, Points_Table, and Strings_Table tells DB Access# the name of the tables that you want the graphics and redline info stored.

# Files_Table: dba_files# Links_Table: dba_links# Points_Table: dba_points# Strings_Table: dba_strings

# If you want to save and load redlines from redlines file dbaccess needs# to know where to look for the redline files. If you do not set# the Redline_Path it will:# a) if you are on the clipper it will use the users current working# directory as the redline storage area.# b) if you are on the pc the default redline storage area will be read# from the dmredl.ini file found in your windows directory.

# Redline_Path: /usr/redlines (on clipper)# Redline_Path: c:\usr\redlines (on pc)

# To be able to view database links between unix and dos, two global# pointers have been set up. DB Access stores the original location# of a file in the database (dba_files). When a user displays a file,# that file is checked against dba_files table to see if it already has# a file number assigned to it. DB Access checks for three file# combination based on the previous pointers.## 1) drive_path_filename to database# 2) dba_files_path/filename to database# 3) dba_files_drive/path_filename to database## where drive_path_filename is:## /usr/files/demo.tg4# or# c:\files\demo.tg4## where dba_files_path is:## /usr/files# or# c:\files## where dba_files_drive is:## /usr# or# c## If after three attempts to make a match fail, a new entry is# put into the database.


# Files_Path: c:\usr\files# Files_Drive: c

# Redline_Mode variable will have an effect on the following# "dba standard buttons":## Draw Arc# Draw Arrow# Draw Circle# Draw Ellipse# Draw Filled Circle# Draw Filled Ellipse# Draw Filled Rectangle# Draw Filled Shape# * Draw Freehand# Draw Line# Draw Rectangle# Draw Shape# * Draw Symbol# Draw Text# ** Copy Redline# ** Delete Redline# ** Move Redline# * Select Redline# ** Undo Redline## * Draw Freehand, Draw Symbol and Select Redline only work on the pc# version of dba.## ** Copy, Delete, Move, and Undo redlines only work on dm redlines.# They will NOT work on dba database redlines.## If Redline_Mode is set to 0, then the previous dba buttons will do# DM/Redline calls so you can save your redlines to a file. If Redline_Mode# is set to 1, then all redlines from the previous buttons will be to the# database.

Redline_Mode: 0

# The Plot_Queue is used on the Clipper only. You use this variable to# specify which queue you want the displayed graphics to be plotted to.

# Plot_Queue: laser

# Graphics window information only used on pc DBA

Graphics_Window_x: 10Graphics_Window_y: 10Graphics_Window_Width: 550Graphics_Window_Height: 450

All keywords in the control file are optional, but the control file must exist.If you want to use only the default values, you can create an empty controlfile.

An example control file, c:\win32app\ingr\dba\support\raster.ctl, is delivered withDB Access. You can copy this file to your working directory and edit it.


2. Set the DBA_RASTER environment variable to the control file you created. For

example:

set DBA_RASTER=raster.ctl

This user variable can also be set in the Control Panel - System.

3. Determine the raster images to be used. You must know the full pathnames of the files.

4. Select or create a schema to be used.

The schema must have the following tables: dba_links, dba_files, anddba_points. Linkages with raster graphics data are stored in these tables.When you use the Create/Alter Table utility in Schema Edit to createthese tables, DB Access automatically adds the correct column names foryou.

12.4.1.1 DB Access Raster Graphics Dialog

The default raster graphics dialog delivered with DB Access is dba_g_menu. It can bedisplayed by pressing the letter v for view.

The following are available on the Raster Graphics Dialog:

Window Area — This button displays the area specified by two points. For moreinformation, see the section Window Area (Raster Graphics).

Fit — This button displays an entire document in the specified window. For moreinformation, see the section Fit (Raster Graphics).

Update — This button refreshes the selected window. For more information, see thesection Update (Raster Graphics).

Pan — This button moves the window area in the direction of the cursor position. Formore information, see the section Pan (Raster Graphics).

Erase Fence — This button erases the selected fence in the raster image in thespecified window. For more information, see the section Erase Fence (Raster Graphics).

Cancel — This button dismisses the selected operation. For more information, see thesection Cancel (Raster Graphics).


Window Scroll — This button moves the window area from one specified point toanother. For more information, see the section Window Scroll (Raster Graphics).

Zoom In — This button displays half as much of the specified file at twice theresolution. For more information, see the section Zoom In (Raster Graphics).

Show Links — This button displays existing links in the selected window. For moreinformation, see the section Show Links (Raster Graphics).

Measure — This button lets you determine the distance between two points in a rasterimage. For more information, see the section Measure (Raster Graphics).

Fence Block — This button lets you select a portion of the raster image in thespecified window. For more information, see the section Fence Block (Raster Graphics).

Load File — This button displays the specified raster file. For more information, seethe section Load File (Raster Graphics).

Window Center — This button brings the selected point of the raster image to thecenter of the window area. For more information, see the section Window Center(Raster Graphics).

Zoom Out — This button displays twice as much of the specified file at half theresolution. For more information, see the section Zoom Out (Raster Graphics).

Rotate Raster — This button moves the raster image in the window area in acounterclockwise direction. For more information, see the section Rotate Raster (RasterGraphics).

Plot Window — This button creates a file in Type 2 (straight byte) format of thespecified display and plots it. For more information, see the section Plot Window(Raster Graphics).

Fence Shape — This button lets you select a portion of the raster image in thespecified window. For more information, see the section Fence Shape (Raster Graphics).

Quit — This button dismisses the selected window. For more information, see thesection Quit (Raster Graphics).

DB Access Commands 13 - 1

DB Access Commands__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

13 - 2 DB Access Commands

DB Access Commands 13 - 3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________13.

DB Access Commands

This section contains alphabetized descriptions of the commands available in DB Access.

In addition to general information about the command, a description may include any of thefollowing, if appropriate. All command descriptions do not include all sections.

Command Path — This figure represents the selection path for the command. Selecteach palette command in the path (from left to right in the figure) to select thecommand. A command can have more than one command path.

Dialog Options — If the command invokes a menu, this section describes the gadgetson the menu.

Before Using This Command — This section contains information you should knowbefore selecting the command.

Operating Sequence — This section provides step-by-step instructions for using thecommand.

13 - 4 DB Access Commands

DB Access Commands A - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Add Query (Database Edit)

The Add Query command lets you establish query criteria.

You can use query criteria to limit the input universe processed by a report. If, for example,you want to search the parts table for tires, you can use the substring search (!!) relationaloperator to query the mfr_name field for the character string Tire. The resulting querycriteria:

parts.mfr_name like ’%Tire%’

would return rows for the two manufacturers in the database that produce tires (GoodTireand Armstrong Tires).

Note that values for substring searches are enclosed in single tics (’) and percentsigns (%).

If you want to search for all parts except tires, you can do one of the following:

Edit the previous query, adding the word not, to produce:

parts.mfr_name not like ’%Tire%’

For information on editing queries, see the section Edit Query (Database Edit).

In the relational operator field, key in not like when adding the query. In themfr_name field, key in %Tire% . Again, the resulting query criteria would be:

parts.mfr_name not like ’%Tire%’

Dialog Options

Add Query — This button places the dialog in add query mode. Any value you key infor a column field is added as query criteria. The value in the database is not changed.The dialog remains in add query mode until you select Add Query again, or selectanother key-in mode.

A - 2 DB Access Commands

AND/OR — This toggle lets you establish a logical AND or OR operation.

— AND returns rows that contain the previous query criteria and the current columnquery criteria.

— OR returns rows that contain the previous query criteria or the current columnquery criteria.

Multiple column searches process in order, with logical AND having precedence overlogical OR.

Relational Operator List — This field lets you specify a relational operator for thequery. You can key in a value or use the list indicator to select a relational operator.The following relational operators are available:

= equal to (default)!= not equal to< less than> greater than<= less than or equal to>= greater than or equal to!! substring search

You can key in any relational operator supported by RIS.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Add Query (Dialog Builder)

There are two places to select the same Add Query gadget in the Dialog Builder:

Use the Override key-in mode:

— OR —

Use the Query:

The Add Query command places an Add Query button, which lets you establish querycriteria, column values used to search the database for rows with common information.


If you select an Add Query button, any value entered in a column field is added as querycriteria, regardless of the default key-in mode for the field. For more information, see thesection Add Query (Database Edit).

Dialog Options

When you select Add Query, the Add Query dialog appears.

The options on this dialog are standard Place Gadget options. See the section Place Gadget(Dialog Builder) if you are not familiar with these options.

Operating Sequence

Place this gadget using the standard Place Gadget operating sequence. See the sectionPlace Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of this sequence.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________AND/OR Toggle (Dialog Builder)

The AND/OR Toggle command places an AND/OR toggle, which lets you select a logicalAND or OR operation when establishing query criteria with Add Query.

AND queries any rows that contain both the previous query criteria and any current columnvalue that is specified. OR queries any row that contains either the previous query criteriaor any current column value that is specified.

Dialog Options

When you select AND/OR Toggle, the AND/OR Toggle dialog appears.


The options on this dialog are standard Place Gadget options. See the section Place Gadget(Dialog Builder) for a description of these options.

Place Text/Place Symbol — See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for adescription of this toggle.

Initially On/Initially Off — This toggle lets you control whether or not the AND/ORtoggle is active the first time a dialog is accessed.

Off Text — This field lets you specify the text that appears when the toggle is set tothe off position, which indicates an AND query.

On Text — This field lets you specify the text that appears when the toggle is set to theon position, which indicates an OR query.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Attach DAP Link (Database Edit)

This function is available in vector graphics only.

Displayable Attributes Processing (DAP) links the column values of the current row to a textnode in a design file. The Attach DAP Link button lets you place a text node, create thelinkage, and load the text node with the current row value.

You can link the current row and one or more text nodes. You can place as many text nodesas needed.

Once the linkage is established, a batch process can update the text nodes in a design filewith the current values in the database. For example, if many elements in the design filehave the same part number, you can place text nodes linked to the part number for thoseelements. If the part number changes, the design file can be updated by changing the partnumber column value in the database and running the Displayable Attributes Batch Process.See the section Displayable Attributes Batch Process.

Dialog Options

When you select Attach DAP Link, the Choose Report dialog appears.

Index Number — This field specifies the index number of the current report. Key in adifferent number to make another report current.

Reports in <filename> — This text field specifies the name of the DAP control file.This is the value defined for DBA_DAP_FILE.

Listing of reports — This field lists the reports in the specified DAP control file. Thecurrent report is highlighted. Select another report to make it current.


Before Using this Command

Administrator Requirements

1. Create the reports that contains the values you want on the text nodes.

2. Place the report names, one report name per line, in a DAP control file.

3. Set the DBA_DAP_FILE environment variable to the name of the DAP control file. Forexample:

set DBA_DAP_FILE=dap.ctl

The user variable can also be set through the Control Panel - System.

4. Set the following MicroStation environment variables:

a. Set MS_FNTLB to the pathname of the default font library. For example:

MS_FNTLB=/usr#/ip32/mstation/font/libs/fontlib

b. Set MS_RSRC to the pathname of the resource file. For example:

MS_RSRC=/usr#/ip32/mstation/ustation.rsc

5. Build a dialog with the following gadgets:

Attach DAP LinkMultiple column field or Worksheet

Process QueryCurrent Row

Place other query gadgets on the dialog to specify a universe other than all rows in atable. If element linkages already exist in the design file, you can also include ReviewElement to establish the current row.

All gadgets required to attach a DAP linkage are available on a defaultdialog.

Runtime User Requirements

1. Access the MicroStation design file. Establish a view that contains at least some of theelements for which you need to place text nodes.

2. Access the DB Access dialog containing the required gadgets.

3. Create a universe containing the rows you want to link to the text nodes in the designfile.


Operating Sequence

1. Select Attach DAP Link.

The Choose Report dialog appears on the screen with a list of available reports. Thecurrent report is highlighted. The prompt Place Text Node Origin appears.

Select a report from the Choose Report dialog if the one you want is not highlighted.

2. Position the cursor where you want the text node and tap the middle mouse button.

The text node and report values appear on the screen.

3. Continue to place text nodes for the current row and report.

— OR —

Change the current row or the current report and place new text nodes.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to exit the command.

You can move a text node after you place it with the MicroStation MoveElement command.

Displayable Attributes Batch Process

Once the linkages are established on the text nodes (with Attach DAP Link), you canupdate the text nodes by running the DB Access Batch DAP processor. From the commandline, key in:

dba -d <DAP_control_file> [other command-line options] <design_filename>

The process lists the reports that are loaded into the design file. It also lists the mslink ofthe report’s row and the MicroStation text node of the old and new report.

If you access the design file through MicroStation, you can see that the displayed values havebeen updated.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Attach DAP Link (Dialog Builder)

The Attach DAP Link command places an Attach DAP Link button, which attaches alinkage from the current row to a text node in a design file.

Attach DAP Link is available in vector graphics only.

Dialog Options

When you select Attach DAP Link, the Attach DAP Link dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Attach DB Linkage (Database Edit)

The Attach DB Linkage command creates a linkage between the current row on theDatabase Edit dialog and a graphic element in a design or raster file. A graphic elementcan be linked to several different database rows.


The database row you want to link to a graphic element must be the current row.

You must select the appropriate linkage mode in the Linkage Mode field. See thesection Linkage Mode Field.

In raster graphics mode, set the Range/Multi field to the appropriate setting. Formore information, see the section DB Access Raster Graphics.

Linkage Mode Field

The Linkage Mode field lets you select the type of linkage created with Attach Linkage.There are four linkage values:

New — This mode creates a Read/Write linkage and a new row in the database for thegraphic element selected. The new row is based on the column values for the currentrow. Use Update Active if you want to change any column values before creating thenew row. The next available mslink value is automatically assigned to the new row.

Existing — This mode creates a Read/Write linkage for the current row and thegraphic element selected.

Info — This mode creates a read-only linkage for the current row and the graphicelement selected.

None — This mode does not create a linkage. In vector graphics mode, this option letsthe administrator prevent runtime users from attaching linkages to the design file.

Operating Sequence (MicroStation)

1. Select Attach DB Linkage from the Database Edit dialog.

The prompt Identify element/reset to exit appears.

2. Position the cursor on the graphic element for which you want to create the databaselinkage. Click the left mouse button.


The element highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject element appears.

— OR —


3. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the design file to accept the highlightedelement.

The message Processing, please wait... appears, followed by Linkage attached. If theLinkage Mode was set to New, the new row is displayed in the Database Edit dialog.


— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the highlighted element. Return to Step 2.

4. Return to Step 2 to attach more database linkages to graphic elements.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to exit the Attach DB Linkage command.

After you attach linkages, you can use the MicroStation Place Fence commandto generate input for a DB Access report.

1. Place a fence that contains the linked elements that you want to include inthe report.

2. Select Process Report from the Report Builder menu bar.

— OR —

Select Process from the Reports area of the DB Access main dialog.Select Query to specify that query criteria is used to generate the inputuniverse.

3. At the prompt, Accept/reject fence contents, click the left mouse button toaccept the fence contents.

Any rows that are linked to elements within the fence (and meet anyadditional query criteria you have set) are included in the report.


Operating Sequence (Raster Graphics)

1. Select Attach DB Linkage from the Database Edit dialog.

2. At the prompt, Enter point 1, identify the area (range or multi-sided) where the linkageis established.

The element highlights and the prompt Accept/reject linkage appears.

— OR —


3. Click the left mouse button to confirm the linkage.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the linkage.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Attach DB Linkage (Dialog Builder)

The Attach DB Linkage command places an Attach DB Linkage button, which creates alinkage between the current row on a DB Access dialog and a graphic element in a design orraster file.

Dialog Options

When you select Attach DB Linkage, the Attach DB Linkage dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Attach File Link (Dialog Builder)

The Attach File Link command places an Attach File Link button, which links rasterelements in the same file or different files.

Dialog Options

When you select Attach File Link, the Attach File Link menu appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Attach Note Link (Dialog Builder)

The Attach Note Link command places an Attach Note Link button, which attaches alinkage from a raster element to a text file.

Dialog Options

When you select Attach Note Link, the Attach Note Link dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Auto Sequence (Dialog Builder)

The Auto Sequence button automatically creates a sequence for non-coded, single columnfields and user fields on a dialog. The fields are sequenced in order of their placement on thedialog.

Before Using This Command

Place the fields on the dialog before selecting Auto Sequence.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Auto Sequence from the Dialog Builder menu bar.

Any non-coded, single column fields and user fields are sequenced in order of theirplacement on the dialog. The sequence appears as yellow dotted arrows between thefields.

DB Access Commands B - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Build Schema List (Schema Edit)

The Build Schema List command lets you build a schema list. Each schema in the list isassigned an integer value that is stored with any dialog or report that references the schema.When schemas are added to the schema list, the list of schemas appears when a SchemaSelect is selected.

Use the Build Schema List command before creating multiple-schema dialog or reporttemplates for users to access with a DB Access Runtime product. Multiple-schema templatesretrieve data from tables in more than one schema.

A schema list is necessary only for multi-schema joins. If no schema list isspecified (using DBA_SCHEMA_LIST or the -S command-line option), anyavailable RIS schema can be attached.

The order of the schema list determines the integer value associated with each schema. Forexample, you build a schema list with three schemas:

schema valueassigned

schema1 1schema2 2schema3 3

You design a multiple-schema dialog while schema3 is the current schema. The dialog joinstables in schema3 and schema1. The integer values 3 and 1 are stored with the dialogtemplate. For a runtime user to access the dialog, the user’s current schema (set withDBA_SCHEMA or the -s command-line option) must have the same data structure asschema3. The first schema in the user’s schema list (set with DBA_SCHEMA_LIST or the -Scommand-line option) must have the same structure as schema1.

B - 2 DB Access Commands

In general, the order of the schema list at build time should be the same as the user’s schemalist at runtime. The runtime user’s current schema should be the same as the currentschema at build time.

The schemas must have the same data structure; they do not have to be thesame schemas. You can design reports and dialogs for multiple schemas of thesame structure.

Dialog Options

When you select Build Schema List, the Build Schema List dialog appears.

Current Schemas — This field displays the current schema list. By default, the listcontains the schemas specified by DBA_SCHEMA_LIST or the -S command-line option.If no schema list has been defined, only the current schema appears.

Delete — This button lets you delete a schema from the schema list. Select Deleteand then the schema to delete. Select Delete again to exit delete mode.

Available Schemas — This field lists schemas that can be added to the schema list.These are the available schemas in the current dictionary database.

DB Access Commands B - 3

Select a schema from the Schema Name column to add it to the schema list. Theschema is inserted above the marker (highlighted) line in the Current Schemas field.If no marker line exists, the schema is inserted at the bottom of the schema list. Selecta line in the schema list to make it a marker line.

B - 4 DB Access Commands

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Button (Dialog Builder)

The Button command places a text, bitmap or symbol button.

Dialog Options

When you select Button, the Button dialog appears.


Operating Sequence


DB Access Commands C - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Cancel (Dialog Builder)

The Cancel command places a Cancel button, which exits you from the current dialog orcancels a process. If the dialog is called from another dialog, the previous dialog appears.

Dialog Options

When you select Cancel, the Cancel dialog appears.


C - 2 DB Access Commands

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Cancel (Raster Graphics)

The Cancel command dismisses the selected operation. To use this command, select Canceland a window.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Change All (Database Edit)

The Change All command lets you change the value of one or more columns for all rows inthe current universe.

You cannot use Change All to edit a serial column (INFORMIX). You cannotenter duplicate values in a column used for unique row identification (mslink,mscatalog.key column, or unique index). For more information, see sectionsEditing Database Values and DB Access Reserved Tables.

Operating Sequence

1. Use the query functions to generate the universe of rows you want to change.

2. Select Change All.

The Change All button appears to be depressed. The screen dialog is in change allmode; any edits you make are added as change criteria.

3. Select a column field. Key in the value you want to establish for all rows in the currentuniverse.

The message Change criteria added appears.

4. Continue to select column fields and key in new values until all change criteria havebeen added.

5. Select Change All again.

The SQL Statements dialog appears, displaying the SQL update statement thatchanges the column values.


You can save the update statement as an SQL template with the Save

SQL command.

6. Select Process from the SQL Statements dialog to update the values in the universe.

— OR —

Select Cancel to cancel the change.

You can bypass steps 5 and 6 setting the global variableDBA_NO_CHANGE_ALL_VERIFY. For more information, see thec:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\globals.txt file.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Change All (Dialog Builder)

The Change All command places a Change All button, which lets you change the value ofone or more columns for all rows in the current universe.

Dialog Options

When you select Change All, the Change All dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Change Row (Database Edit)

The Change Row command puts the dialog in change row mode, which overrides the key-inmode for key column, add query, and update active fields. Key column, add query, andupdate active fields can be placed on custom dialogs created with DB Access.

By default, the multiple column field on the Database Edit dialog is in change row mode.To update a value in the current row, select the appropriate column field and key in a newvalue. The row is automatically updated in the database.

You cannot use Change Row to edit a serial column (INFORMIX). You cannotenter duplicate values in a column used for unique row identification (mslink,mscatalog.key column, or unique index). For more information, see sectionsEditing Database Values and DB Access Reserved Tables.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Change Row.

The Change Row button appears to be depressed. The screen dialog is in change rowmode; any column values you edit are updated in the database.

2. Select a key column, add query, or update active field. Key in a new value.

The message Row changed appears.

3. Continue to select column fields and key in new values until all changes have beenmade.

4. Select Change Row again to exit change row mode.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Change Row (Dialog Builder)

The Change Row command places a Change Row button, which lets you edit columnvalues for a displayed row. The Change Row function lets you edit key columns, add querycolumns, and update active columns.

Dialog Options

When you select Change Row, the Change Row dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Check Box (Dialog Builder)

The Check Box command places a checklist box. You can use scripts to define the functionor read the value of the checklist box.

Dialog Options

When you select Check Box, the Check Box/Radio Button dialog appears.

Unselected/Selected — This toggle specifies the default value for the checklist box.Unselected means the box does not have a check mark (that is, it is not selected).Selected means the box will be checked.

Radio Group — This field specifies a label number for a group of checklist boxes thatyou place. Assigning a group label number lets you treat the checklist as a singlegadget, with only one box selectable at a time. Each box also has an individual labelnumber. If Group Label is non-zero, Radio buttons are placed instead of checklists.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Clear All Dialogs (Dialog Builder)

The Clear All Dialogs command clears all dialogs from the dialog builder.

Operating Sequence

When you select the Clear All Dialogs command, all the dialogs currently loaded in theDialog Builder disappear.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Column (Dialog Builder)

Single Column — This button lets you place a single column field, which displays acolumn value from the current row. See the section Single Column (Dialog Builder).

Multiple Column — This button lets you place a multiple column field, which displaysone or more column values from the current row. See the section Multiple Column(Dialog Builder).

Worksheet — This button lets you place multiple column fields, which display columnvalues from the current universe of rows. Worksheet columns show more than one rowat a time. See the section Worksheet (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Column (Report Builder)

The Column (Report Builder) command places a field that retrieves and prints columnvalues from the current universe of rows. Column fields are the most important on thereport template, because they retrieve information fields from the database, user data file, orASCII file. Column fields are usually placed on body lines.

Join columns let you use a single table report to report on more than one table. Any twodatabase tables that have columns with common values can be joined. See the section JoinColumns.

There is no need to use the more complex unrelated table report unless thetables are not related. For example, to report on the manufacturer and saletables, which do not share a join column, you need an unrelated tables reporttemplate. You must place separate body lines for each table in the report.

Dialog Options

When you select Column, the DBA Column Field dialog appears.


The following list describes the options on the menu except for the Print Condition field,which is described in the section Place Field.

Schema — This field specifies the schema containing the table for which you want toplace a column field. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator toselect a new schema.

Table — This field specifies the table for which you want to place a column field. Youcan key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table.

Column — This field specifies the column from the current table for which you want toplace a column field. You can key in a new column name or use the list indicator toselect a new column.

Join Columns — This button lets you review and edit the join column relationship.The button is inactive until join columns are specified.

If you place a column field from a table other than the current table on a single tablereport, you must specify a join column between the primary (that is, the current) tableand the secondary table. See the section Join Columns.

Code Text/Number — These radio buttons lets you specify whether the column fielddisplays the code number or code text for a coded column. These radio buttons areinactive until a coded column is specified in the Column field.

Length — This field specifies the character length of the column field.

Decimal Places — This field specifies the number of decimal places for numeric data.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Column from the Report Builder menu bar.

The DBA Column Field dialog appears.

2. At the Column field, enter the name of a column from the current table using key-in orthe list indicator. Go to Step 5.

— OR —

At the Schema and/or Table field, enter a new schema and/or table using key-in or thelist indicator.


The DBA Join Columns dialog appears.

3. At the Column field for the primary table, enter the name of the join column usingkey-in or the list indicator. Repeat for the secondary table.

— Then —

Specify whether the join is an outer join. Select OK to return to the DBA ColumnField dialog.

The DBA Join Columns dialog disappears. The Join Columns button on the DBAColumn Field dialog is active.

You can optionally specify all table relations in your database throughEdit Relations (Utilities - Schema Edit.)

4. At the Column field on the DBA Column Field dialog, use key-in or the list indicatorto enter the name of the column from the secondary table for which you want to place afield.

5. Set any other parameters as needed. Select OK.

The field is dynamically attached to the cursor. The values in the message area can helpyou position the field on the dialog. DB Access uses F-1, F-2, and so on to represent thefirst, second, and any subsequent fields on a line.

6. Click the left mouse button to place the field.

The field is inserted before the current field (if any), with one space separating the twofields. Any fields to the right of the new field will shift to the right.

You can realign the fields using the following commands:

Move FieldDelete FieldUndelete Field (Report Builder)

Insert Space (Report Builder)Delete Space

— OR —

Select Cancel to end the placement.


Once you establish a join column between two tables, you can place additional

column fields from the secondary table. The DBA Join Columns dialog doesnot reappear.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Combo Box (Dialog Builder)

The Combo Box command places a combo box on the current dialog.

Dialog Options

When you select Combo Box, the Combo Box dialog appears.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Copy Field

The Copy Field command copies a field on a report template one or more times.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu, then select Field and Copy from the pulldownmenus.

The prompt Select field appears.

2. Select a field on the current report template.

The field is dynamically attached to the cursor. As you move the cursor over the reporttemplate, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column,line type, table, and field.

DB Access uses F-1, F-2, and so on to represent the first, second, and anysubsequent fields on a line.


DB Access copies the field to the new position.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to select a different field. Return to Step 2.


4. Continue to copy the field to new positions.

— OR —


— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Copy Gadget (Dialog Builder)

The Copy Gadget (Dialog Builder) command copies a gadget on the displayed dialog oneor more times.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and Copy from the pulldown menus.

The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears.

2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) on the currentdialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget (obtained by selecting the DisplayLabels command from the Dialog Builder menu bar).

The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears.

— OR —


3. To accept the gadget, click the left mouse button or press Return.

The gadget attaches to the cursor in drag mode. The prompt Select placement pointappears.

— OR —

Double Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget. Return to Step 2.

4. Move the cursor to a new location on the dialog.


The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the gadget on thedialog.

5. Click the left mouse button.

A copy of the gadget is placed at the new location.

6. Return to Step 4 to place another copy of the gadget in a new location.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to select a new gadget to copy. Return to Step 2.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Copy Line

The Copy Line command copies a line on a report template one or more times.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Line and Copy from the pulldown menus.

The prompt Select line appears.

2. Select a line on the current report template.

The line is dynamically attached to the cursor. As you move the cursor over the reporttemplate, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column,table, and field.

3. Click the left mouse button to place the line.

DB Access copies the line to the new position.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to select a different line. Return to Step 2.

4. Continue to copy the line to new positions.

— OR —



— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Copy Redlines (Dialog Builder)

The Copy Redlines command places a Copy Redlines button, which lets you copy theredlines on the drawing.

Dialog Options

When you select Copy Redlines, the Copy Redlines dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Counter (Report Builder)

The Counter (Report Builder) command lets you place a field that prints the number ofrows that have processed. The fields in any default report under the text field Quantity arecounter fields.

You can set up counters to count certain types of rows or to give subtotals of the number ofrows processed. A counter field on an All Tables line counts the rows for all tables; a counterfield on a line for a particular table counts rows for that table only. Counter fields used forsubtotals and totals are usually placed on body lines and final lines respectively.

Dialog Options

When you select Counter, the DBA Counter Field dialog appears.


Length — This field lets you specify the length of the counter field.


Update Condition — This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for thefield to be incremented. If the Update Condition field is blank, the counter field isincremented for every row.

Reset Condition — This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for thefield to be reset to zero. If the Reset Condition field is blank, the counter field is notreset.

Operating Sequence

Place this field using the standard Place Field operating sequence. See the section PlaceField for a description of this sequence.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Create/Alter Table (Schema Edit)

The Create/Alter Table command lets you create a new table or alter an existing one. Usethis command to:

Define columns for a new table.

Copy the column definition of an existing table to a new table.

Add columns to existing tables.

Create DB Access reserved tables.

Define coded columns and create the join tables to contain the code list values.


Dialog Options

When you select Create/Alter Table, the Create/Alter Table dialog appears.

Schema — This field specifies the schema for which you want to create or alter a table.You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema.

Table — This field specifies the name of the table to create or alter. You can key in atable name or use the list indicator to select a table. If you specify an existing table, thedialog is in alter table mode; if you specify a new table, the dialog is in create tablemode.

If you key in the name of a DB Access reserved table that does not alreadyexist, DB Access automatically adds the appropriate columns. For moreinformation, see the section DB Access Reserved Tables.

Apply — This button creates a new table or alters an existing one. Select this buttonafter specifying the columns to be added. If you dismiss the dialog without selectingProcess, the new table is not created or the existing table is not altered.

Column Name — This field specifies the name of a column to add to the specifiedtable.

Type — This checklist lets you select the data type for the column.

— If you select Character, a Length field appears. Key in a size for the characterdata.


— If you select Coded, the Coded Column Options dialog appears. This dialog is

described in the section Adding Coded Columns.

Nulls Allowed — This toggle specifies whether the column accepts null values.

INFORMIX does not support adding not null columns to existing tables.

Column Name, Type, Size, Nulls — This field lists information about the columns forthe specified table. If you are creating a table, this field displays the columns you add.If you are altering a table, this field displays the existing columns plus any columns youadd.

Create Table Mode/Alter Table Mode — This text string indicates whether the tableis in create table or alter table mode. This mode is set when you enter a table name inthe Table field.

Add Column — This button lets you build an add-column list, which appears in thecolumn list field. Columns in the add-column list do not exist until you select Process.

Select Add Column after specifying the parameters for the column. The column isinserted above the marker (highlighted) line in the column list field. If no marker lineexists, the column is inserted at the bottom of the column list. Select a line in the add-column list to make it a marker line. You cannot select an existing column.

Modify Column — This button lets you modify columns in the add-column list. Youcannot modify an existing column.

Select Modify Column and then the column to modify. Information for the column isreflected in the Column Name, Type, and Nulls Allowed gadgets. You can edit thisinformation. You can edit multiple columns or select Modify Column again to exitmodify column mode.

Delete Column — This button lets you delete any columns in the add-column list. Youcannot delete an existing column.

Select Delete Column and then a column to delete. You can delete multiple columnsor select Delete Column again to exit the delete column mode.

Clear List — This button clears all columns from the add-column list. You cannotclear existing columns.

Add mslink — This button adds the mslink column to the add-column list.

The mslink column is one method DB Access uses for unique row identification.MicroStation uses mslink to specify a row that a graphics element is linked to. Thus,you must add mslink to a table before linking rows from the table to graphic elementsin a design file.


When you select Apply after adding an mslink column to an existing table, the DefineKey Columns dialog appears. This dialog is described in the section Define KeyColumns Dialog.

You can use the Create/Alter Table dialog to copy an existing table’s columndefinition to a new table.

1. Specify an existing schema and table in the Schema and Table fields.

The existing columns appear in the column list.

2. Specify a new schema and/or table to copy the columns to.

3. Select Process.

A new table with the same column definition is created. If one of thecolumns is coded, the appropriate join table is created, if it does not exist.

Define Key Columns Dialog

When you add the mslink column to an existing table and select Process, the Define KeyColumns dialog appears.

Column Name, Type, Size, Nulls — This field lists information about the columns forthe specified table. Select a column containing unique values (one with a unique index)or a combination of columns that together uniquely identify a row. This ensures thatthe added mslink values are unique for each row in the table.

Process — This button adds the mslink column to the specified table. DB Accessgenerates unique mslink values for each row based on the columns you selected.


All Columns — This button selects all columns in the column list field. You can use allcolumns to identify rows uniquely or you can select a column a second time to deselectit.

Adding Coded Columns

When you create a table with a coded column or add a coded column to an existing table, DBAccess also creates a join table to contain the code list values. You can specify names for thejoin table and the columns in the table. You can include an index column if the join table willcontain more than one code list. For more information, see these sections

Edit Code (Database Edit)DB Access Reserved Tables

Before adding a coded column to a table, you must create the mscodelist tablefor the schema. If you key in mscodelist in the Table field on theCreate/Alter Table dialog, DB Access automatically adds the appropriatecolumns. Select Process to create the table.

The table to which you add a coded column should have a means of unique rowidentification (mslink, mscatalog.key_columns, or unique index) so you can useEdit Code to add code list values to rows in the table.

Dialog Options

When you select the Coded checklist box on the Create/Alter Table dialog, the CodeColumn Options dialog appears.

Join Table — This field specifies the name of the join table that contains the code listvalues for the coded column. By default, Join Table has the same name as the codedcolumn. You can key in a different name or use the list indicator to select an existingjoin table.


Code Column — This field specifies the name of the column that contains codenumber values. By default the column is named code_number. You can key in adifferent name or use the list indicator to select an existing column.

Text Column — This field specifies the name of the column that contains code textvalues. By default the column is named code_text. You can key in a different name oruse the list indicator to select an existing column.

Index — This checklist box lets you add an index column to the join table. If you selectIndex, the following fields appear:

— Index Column. This field specifies the name of the column that contains indexvalues. You can key in a name or use the list indicator to select an existing column.

— Index Value. This field specifies the index value for the coded column being added.

You can store multiple code lists in a join table by:

Specifying the same join table name, but different code column and text column namesfor each code list.

Selecting the Index checklist. Specify the same join table, code column, text column,and index column names, but different index value for each code list.

When you select Edit Code in Database Edit, only the appropriate code list values appear.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Create/Edit Group (Dialog Builder)

The Create/Edit Group command lets you create and edit gadget groups. Creating groupslets you associate gadgets with similar functions.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit Group from the pulldown menu.


2. Select a gadget on the current dialog or key in the numeric label field for the gadget(obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the pulldown menu).


— OR —


3. To accept the gadget, click the right mouse button or press Enter.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Create Sequence (Dialog Builder)

The Create Sequence command creates linkages between dialog gadgets to define asequence for users to follow. At runtime, when the user completes an operation with asequenced gadget, the next gadget in the sequence highlights.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Create Sequence from the Dialog Builder menu bar.


2. Select a gadget on the current dialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget(obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menubar).


— OR —


3. To accept the gadget, click the right mouse button or press Return.

An arrow is dynamically attached to the cursor and the prompt Poke next gadget insequence appears.

4. Select the next gadget in the sequence.



5. To accept the gadget, click the right mouse button or press Return.

The established linkage is displayed as a dotted yellow arrow between the two gadgets.The prompt Poke next gadget in sequence appears.

— OR —

If the new linkage is the second linkage from or to one of the gadgets, the existing linkageappears in red and the new linkage appears in green. The prompt Accept = Green Link;Reject = Red Link appears.

Click the right mouse button to replace the existing linkage with the new linkage, orclick the right mouse button to keep the existing linkage and reject the new linkage.

6. Return to Step 4 to continue linking gadgets.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Current Row (Database Edit)

The gadgets in the Current Row area let you determine which row in the universe iscurrent. Column values for the current row appear in the multiple column field on theDatabase Edit dialog.

Current Row Slider — Move the slider to scroll through the universe of rows.

Previous Row — This (left-facing) arrow makes the previous row current. Select thearrow repeatedly to move backward through the universe a row at a time.

Next Row — This (right-facing) arrow makes the next row current. Select the arrowrepeatedly to move forward through the universe a row at a time.

Pick Row — This field lets you key in the number of a row to make it current.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Current Row (Dialog Builder)

The Current Row command calls a palette containing commands that let you place buttonsfor manipulating a universe of rows.

Row Text — This button places a text field that displays the number for the currentrow. The number is the current row’s position in the current universe (for example,Row 2 of 49). See the section Current Row Text (Dialog Builder).

Next Row — This button places a Next Row button, which makes the next row in theuniverse the current row. Column values for the current row appear in theircorresponding column fields on the dialog. See the section Next Row (Dialog Builder).

Pick Row — This button places a Pick Row field, which displays the current rownumber. A user can edit the value in a Pick Row field to change the current row. Seethe section Pick Row (Dialog Builder).

Previous Row — This button places a Previous Row button, which makes theprevious row in the universe the current row. Column values for the current rowappear in their corresponding column fields on the dialog. See the section Previous Row(Dialog Builder).

Row Slider — This button places a row slider, which determines which row in theuniverse is current. Column values for the current row appear in their correspondingcolumn fields on the dialog. See the section Current Row Slider (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Current Row Slider (Dialog Builder)

The Current Row Slider command places a row slider, which determines which row in theuniverse is current. Column values for the current row appear in their corresponding columnfields on the dialog.

Dialog Options

When you select Current Row Slider, the Current Row Slider dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Current Row Text (Dialog Builder)

The Current Row Text command places a text field that displays the number for thecurrent row. When you place the field, it reads Row n of n.

At runtime, the field displays the current row number and current universe size (forexample, Row 2 of 49 for the second row in a universe of 49 rows).

Dialog Options

When you select Current Row Text, the Current Row Text dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Current Table Text (Dialog Builder)

The Current Table Text command lets you place a field that displays the table name forthe table associated with the current dialog. For example, if the dialog is associated with atable named parts, at runtime the user would see parts table displayed in the Current Tabletext field.

Dialog Options

When you select Current Table Text, the Current Table Text dialog appears.



Operating Sequence


DB Access Commands D - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Database Utilities (Dialog Builder)

The Database Utilities command calls a panel menu that contains commands forinteractively placing gadgets on the current dialog.

Column — This button calls a palette of commands that let you place column fields onthe current dialog. See the section Column (Dialog Builder).

Current Row — This button calls a palette of commands that let you place gadgets formanipulating a universe of rows. The gadgets include the same functions found in theCurrent Row box in Database Edit. See the section Current Row (Dialog Builder).

Delete — This button calls a palette of commands that let you place function buttonsthat let you delete rows from the current universe. See the section Delete (DialogBuilder).

Edit Code — This button lets you place an Edit Code button, which lets you display,edit, and insert new code list values in a code list. See the section Edit Code (DialogBuilder).

Fields On/Off — This button lets you place a Fields On/Off button, which toggles allcolumn fields on or off. Off fields are excluded from universe reviews and are skippedover when a user enters data. See the section Fields On/Off (Dialog Builder).

Insert Row — This button lets you place an Insert Row button, which inserts a newrow based on the column values for the displayed row. See the section Insert Row(Dialog Builder).

Override Key-in Mode — This button calls a palette of commands that let you placefunction buttons to let the user override key-in modes for column fields. See the sectionOverride Key-in (Dialog Builder).

D - 2 DB Access Commands

Query — This button calls a palette of commands that let you place various queryfunction buttons on the current dialog. See the section Query (Dialog Builder).

Report — This button calls a palette of commands that let you generate report outputor review the current universe of rows. See the section Report (Dialog Builder).

Restore Defaults — This button places a Restore Defaults button, which restoresthe default values of the displayed columns. In effect, it erases the display of thecurrent row. See the section Restore Defaults (Dialog Builder).

SQL Statement — This button lets you place an SQL Statement button, whichprocesses any SQL statements associated with the button. See the section SQLStatement (Dialog Builder).

Schema Select — This button lets you place a field with a list indicator that displaysall current schemas in a user’s schema list. See the section Schema Select (DialogBuilder).

Table Select — This button lets you place a field with a list indicator that displays alltables in the current schema. See the section Table Select (Dialog Builder).

Current Table Text — This button lets you place a field that displays the table namefor the table associated with the current dialog. This field operates identically to thefield on the Database Edit screen that displays the current table name. See the sectionCurrent Table Text (Dialog Builder).

Update Row — This button places an Update Row button, which updates the currentrow based on the currently displayed column values. See the section Update Row(Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Date

The Date command places a field that prints the system date (month, date, and year) in aformat that you choose. You usually place date fields on a top or preface line.

Dialog Options

When you select Date, the DBA Date Field dialog appears.


Date Formats — This checklist lets you select the print format for the date field.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Define Structure

The Define Structure command calls the DBA Structure Definition dialog containingcommands for defining data structure templates.

Several Intergraph applications and some customers use user data on MicroStation elementsand ASCII or binary files to store data. DB Access requires data structure templates so thatreports can be written on this data. Once these templates are defined, reports can be createdin the same way that they are for databases. The DBA Structure Definition dialogchanges slightly as you choose to define an ASCII, Binary, or user data template. For moreinformation, see sections ASCII Structure, Userdata Structure.


You must know the structure of the file on which you want to report.

ASCII Structure

Selecting a structure type of ASCII from the Structure Definition dialog lets you define astructure template so that DB Access can report on data in an ASCII file. DB Access usesthe structure template to interpret the ASCII file and format the specified data into a report.

The template you create describes a row structure, or table, for the ASCII file and thecolumns (type, length, and offset) for that table.


Dialog Options

When you select a structure type of ASCII from the DBA Structure Definition dialog, thedialog appears as follows:

Table Number — This field specifies the table number.

Table Name — This field specifies the table name.

Table Condition — This field specifies a condition that must exist for a row in theASCII input file to qualify as this table type. This is only necessary if multiple rowtypes exist in the input file. If the field is blank, all rows qualify. The table conditionnormally compares column values to a constant, for example:

c_type == 1

If the type column equals 1, this row qualifies for this table.

Tables — This select-only field lists the specified tables.

Select a line to make it a marker (highlighted) line. The dialog cannot be in delete oredit mode. (That is, the Delete and Edit buttons are not depressed). New tables canbe added and the delete buffer inserted before a marker line.


Columns — This select-only field lists the columns in the specified tables.

Select a line to make it a marker (highlighted) line. The dialog cannot be in delete oredit mode. (That is, the Delete and Edit buttons are not depressed.) New columns canbe added and the delete buffer inserted before a marker line.

Column Number — This field specifies the column number.

Column Name — This field specifies the column name.

Column Type — This checklist lets you select the column data type (Floating Point,Integer, or Character).

Length — This field specifies the number of characters in the field.

Byte Offset — This field specifies where the valid data begins relative to zero.

Load — This button loads an ASCII structure from a template library.

Save — This button saves an ASCII structure to a template library.

Edit — This button places the dialog in edit mode. Select Edit and then select acolumn from the column list. The attributes for the column appear in the area at thebottom of the dialog. You can edit these attributes.

Delete — This button puts the dialog in delete mode; any line, either table or column,you select is deleted and stored in a delete buffer. The delete buffer stores deleted linesuntil you exit delete mode. Select Delete again to exit delete mode. The delete bufferis cleared whenever you enter delete mode.

Add Table — This button adds the table to the table list.

Add Column — This button adds a column to the column list. Select Add after youenter information at the bottom of the dialog. The new column is inserted before themarker line in the column list. If no marker line exists, the new column is inserted atthe bottom of the list.

Binary Structure

Selecting a structure type of Binary from the DBA Structure Definition dialog lets youdefine a structure template so that DB Access can report on data in a binary file. DB Accessuses the structure template to interpret the binary file and format the specified data into areport.

The template you create describes a row structure, or table, for the binary file and thecolumns (type, length, and offset) for that table.


Dialog Options

The dialog for binary structure definition contains many of the same features as the ASCIIstructure definition dialog. See ASCII Structure for information on these features.

When you select a structure type of binary from the DBA Structure Definition dialog, thedialog appears as follows:

Table Length — This field lets you manually restrict the columns in the specifiedtable. This number is adjusted as you add and delete columns.

Column Type — This checklist lets you select the column data type. The followingtypes are available:

Bit FieldCharacter4-byte Float

8-byte Float1-byte Integer2-byte Integer

3-byte Integer4-byte Integer

Bit Offset — This field specifies where the relevant data begins in bits (for bit fieldsonly).

DB Access supports variable length records in Unrelated Tables reports.


Userdata Structure

Selecting a structure type of Userdata from the DBA Structure Definition dialog lets youdefine a structure template so that DB Access can report on user data in a design file. DBAccess uses the structure template to interpret the user data and format it into a report.

The template you create describes a user data structure, or table, for the user data design fileand the columns (type, length, and offset) for that table. These columns identify the fieldscarried in the design file.

Userdata structures can be delivered with an application product. If not, you can define thestructure of the nongraphic data attached to graphic elements using the Define Structurecommand.

Dialog Options

The dialog for binary structure definition contains many of the same features as the ASCIIstructure definition dialog. See the section ASCII Structure for information on thesefeatures.

When you select a structure type of Userdata from the DBA Structure Definition dialog,the dialog appears as follows:


Column Type — This checklist lets you select the column data type. The followingtypes are available:

Bit FieldCharacter4-byte Float

8-byte Float1-byte Integer2-byte Integer

3-byte Integer4-byte Integer

Bit Offset — This field specifies where the relevant data begins in bits (for bit fieldsonly).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete (Dialog Builder)

The Delete command calls a menu panel containing commands that let you place buttons fordeleting rows in the current universe.

Delete All — This button places a Delete All button, which deletes all rows in thecurrent universe from the database. See the section Delete All (Dialog Builder).

Delete Row — This button places a Delete Row button, which deletes the displayedrow from the database. See the section Delete Row (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete All (Database Edit)

The Delete All command deletes all rows in the current universe from the database uponverification.

Operating Sequence

1. Use the query functions to generate the universe of rows you want to delete.

2. Select Delete All.

The SQL Statements dialog appears, displaying an SQL delete statement that deletes thecurrent universe of rows.

You can save the delete statement as an SQL template with the SaveSQL command.

3. Select Process from the SQL Statements dialog to delete the rows.

— OR —

Select Cancel to cancel the deletion.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete All (Dialog Builder)

The Delete All command places a Delete All button, which deletes all rows in the currentuniverse from the database.

Dialog Options

When you select Delete All, the Delete All dialog appears.



Operating Sequence


Operating Sequence

1. Select Placement from the Toolbar menu. Select Delete and Delete All from thepulldown menus.

The Delete All dialog appears.

2. Edit the available parameters or accept the default parameters. Select Exit and Saveto place the button.

If you selected Keyin and specified coordinates, the Delete All button is automaticallyplaced on the dialog.

— OR —

If you selected Data Point, the button is dynamically attached to the screen cursor. Thex,y coordinates appear in the message area so you can position the button.

Click the middle mouse button to specify the upper left corner for the Delete Allbutton. Click the middle mouse button a second time to specify the lower right corner.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete Field

The Delete Field command deletes a field from a report template.

You can also use Delete Field to delete a field of spaces, any number of spacesbetween two fields. Fields to the right of the cursor position are shifted over tothe current cursor position. Use Delete Field with Undelete Field, to align orreposition fields on different lines.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field and Delete from the pulldownmenus.

The prompt Select Field appears.

As you move the cursor over the report template, information in the message areachanges to reflect the current line, column, table, and field.


2. Select a field on the current report template.

The prompt Accept/Reject field appears.

3. Click the left mouse button to delete the field.

DB Access deletes the field.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the deletion.


When you delete a field in the report template, fields to the right of the deleted

field stay in the same position. Click the left mouse button again to delete thefield of spaces between the cursor and the next field.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete Gadget (Dialog Builder)

The Delete Gadget (Dialog Builder) command deletes a gadget on the current dialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and Delete from the pulldownmenus.


2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) on the currentdialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget (obtained by selecting the DisplayLabels command from the Dialog Builder menu panel).


— OR —



The gadget is deleted.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget.

The gadget is not deleted.


4. Return to Step 2 to select another gadget.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete Group (Dialog Builder)

The Delete Group command lets you delete the group status of an existing gadget group.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete Line

The Delete Line command deletes a line from a report template.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit on the Toolbar menu. Select Line and Delete from the pulldown menus.

The prompt Select Line appears.


2. Select a line on the current report template.

The prompt Accept/Reject line appears.

3. Click the left mouse button to delete the line.

DB Access deletes the line.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the deletion.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete Redlines (Dialog Builder)

The Delete Redlines command places a Delete Redlines button, which deletes theredlines on the drawing by the user.

Dialog Options

When you select Delete Redlines, the Delete Redlines dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete Row (Database Edit)

The Delete Row command deletes the current row from the database. When you selectDelete Row, a dialog appears asking you to verify the deletion.

Select Yes to delete the current row.

Select No to cancel the deletion.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete Row (Dialog Builder)

The Delete Row command places a Delete Row button, which deletes the current row fromthe database.

Dialog Options

When you select Delete Row, the Delete Row dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete Sequence (Dialog Builder)

The Delete Sequence button lets you delete linkages in an existing sequence.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Options from the Toolbar menu. Select Sequencing and Delete from thepulldown menus.

Any existing linkages appear as dotted yellow arrows between gadgets. The promptSelect gadget or key in label appears.

2. Select the gadget that initiates a linkage, or key in the numeric label for that gadget(obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menupanel).


— OR —


3. To accept the gadget, tap the middle mouse button or press <Return>.

The linkage appears in red and the prompt Accept/reject deletion of this linkage appears.

Click the left mouse button to delete the linkage.

— OR —

If no linkage exists, the message Gadget is not linked to anything appears.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Delete Space

The Delete Space command lets you delete spaces between fields in a report template.

You can use the Delete Field command to delete several spaces at once. Formore information, see the section Delete Field.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Delete space from the pulldown menu.

2. Place the cursor where you want to delete spaces. Click the left mouse button once foreach space.

Fields to the right of the cursor are moved left.

3. Delete spaces from a new location.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Derived

The Derived command lets you place a field that prints the results of a formula. Thisformula can be a user variable or an equation using specified fields, columns, constants, orvariables. Derived fields are usually placed on body lines and display in the report templateas a string of Ds.

Dialog Options

When you select Derived, the DBA Derived Field dialog appears.


Length — This field lets you specify the length of the derived field.

Decimal Places — This field specifies the number of decimal places.

Formula — This field lets you specify a formula, the result of which prints in thederived field.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Design Options

The Design Options command calls a dialog that lets you save and load parameterscommonly used in dialog or report design.

When you select Design Options, the Design Options dialog appears:


Template — Specifies the template library.

Description — Specifies a description of the template.

Load Options — This button lets you load an existing options template from aspecified template library.

Save Options — This button lets you save common parameters to an options template.See the section Save Options.

Dialog Location — These fields let you specify the x and y origin and height andwidth of a new blank dialog in pixels.

Typeface & Size Sample — Displays an example of the typeface with the currentdisplay settings.

Typeface — Specifies the default typeface for new gadgets.

Size — Specifies the text size in points for new gadgets.

Bold — Specifies the display text is boldface.

Italic — Specifies the display text is italicized.

Load Dialog Cell — This parameter specifies the active dialog cell for the Place Cellcommand. Either key in a dialog template name or select the Load Dialog Cell buttonand select one from a template library.

Verbose Mode — Controls verbose notification of script errors.

— Edit Settings — This button calls the Verbose Error Settings dialog, which letsyou select which function types undergo verbose error checking (standard C, DBAccess, I/Forms, I/NFM, RIS, or all).


Builder Modes — Specifies default verification mode.

– No save dialog — Dialogs are always saved by the current name/description.

– No save on template change — Disables save check when templates are modified.

– Don’t verify template replace — Templates are replaced without the Yes/Nodialog.

– Don’t verify template delete — Templates are deleted without the Yes/No dialog.

– Don’t erase dialog on save — Dialogs are still displayed after saving.

Grid Lock — Specifies a grid lock number used in placing gadgets. If you set the gridlock number to 10, gadgets placed by data point are forced to x and y coordinates thatare multiples of 10.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Dial (Dialog Builder)

The Dial command places a dial that can display a range of values to be used with aparticular command. The values can be set by way of the FIg_set_value script function, or bya data link from another gadget.

Dialog Options

When you select Dial, the Dial dialog appears.

High Value — Defines the highest value appearing on the dial. The check by the fieldtoggles on and off to indicate that the value does (the default) or does not be display onthe dial.

Initial Value — Defines the initial value appearing on the dial. The check by the fieldtoggles on and off to indicate that the value does (the default) or does not be display onthe dial.

Increment — Sets the increments the dial moves by.


Zero location — Sets the starting location of the dial relative the highest value.

Ticks — Sets the number of ticks in a complete revolution.

Units/Tick — Sets the number of units the dial moves for each tick.

Clockwise/Counterclockwise — Determines the direction the dial moves.

Length — Specifies the number of characters on the dial value readout.

Decimal — Specifies the number of decimal places displayed for the dial values.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Display Group (Dialog Builder)

The Display Group command places a Display Group button, which displays a specifiedgroup of gadgets when selected.

Dialog Options

When you select Display Group, the Display Group dialog appears.

The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the standard gadget options.See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options.

Group Label — The group label number assigned by DB Access when the groupgadget is created. The Create/Edit Group command displays this number when thegroup gadget is created or edited.


Operating Sequence


To make two Display Group gadgets, erase the other group, put them in thesame group and make the group single-select. For more information see sectionCreate/Edit Group (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Display Labels (Dialog Builder)

The Display Labels command displays the numeric label of all gadgets on the currentdialog. The label can used in scripting to reference gadgets. Several Dialog Buildercommands let you identify gadgets by keying in their numeric labels.


The labels disappears whenever the dialog is refreshed.


The gadgets you want to label must be placed on the current dialog.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Display Dialog (Dialog Builder)

The Display Dialog command places a Display Dialog button, which displays a dialog thatyou specify. This function lets you design dialogs that call other dialogs.

Dialog Options

When you select Display Dialog, the Display Dialog dialog appears.

See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options.

Dialog Template — This field lets you specify the dialog template associated with thebutton. Key in the dialog name or select it from the list indicator.

At runtime, the template library in which the associated dialog template isstored must be current (specified by DBA_LIB), or listed in the library list(specified with DBA_LIST_LIB). Otherwise, DB Access cannot find thedialog template.


Preserve Invoking Dialog/Erase Invoking Dialog — This toggle specifies whetherthe dialog with the Display Dialog button remains displayed when the new dialog isloaded, or if the invoking dialog is erased.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Document List (Dialog Builder)

The Document List command places a field that displays a document list, a list of items onwhich you can perform associated commands. When you select an item from the documentlist, the associated commands are executed.

Dialog Options

When you select Document List, the Document List dialog appears. (The followingfigures show the dialog with the Create Report and Named File options selected.)


The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, Color, andLocation options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of theseoptions.

Create Report/Named File — This toggle specifies whether you use a report togenerate the document list or use a named (ASCII) file associated with a column valuein the database.

Report Template — This field specifies the report template used to generate thedocument list. You can key in a new template name or use the list indicator to select anew template. This field appears only when Create Report is selected.

Schema — This field specifies an RIS schema containing the table for which you wantto place a document list field. You can key in a new schema name or use the listindicator to select a new schema. This field appears only when Named File is selected.

Table — This field specifies the table containing the column for which you want toplace a document list field. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator toselect a new table. This field appears only when Named File is selected.

Column — This field specifies the column containing the column value for which youwant to place a document list field. You can key in a new column name or use the listindicator to select a new column. This field appears only when Named File is selected.

Rows — This field specifies the number of rows displayed at one time in the documentlist field. Scroll bars to the right of the document list field provide access to rows thatare not displayed.

Length — This field specifies the character length of the rows in the document listfield. You can set the length so that you see only the item name and/or description.

Current Row/Current Query — This toggle specifies whether the report is based onthe current row or the current query. Depending on the setting, the document list isrepainted when the current row changes or when you select Process Query. Thistoggle appears only when Create Report is selected.

— If Current Row is selected, only the command associated with the current row isavailable. Changing the current row changes the available command.

— If Current Query is selected, all commands associated with rows that meet thecurrent query criteria are available from the document list field. Selecting ProcessQuery repaints the document list.

Field Options — This subdialog lets you call other dialogs to set further parameters.Select from Editing, Scrolling, List, and Defaults/Verify. The respective dialogs aredescribed in the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder).



You must create the table that the specified report template references. You must create thereport template.

— OR —

You must create the table containing the column for which the document list field is placed.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Arc (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Arc command places a Draw Arc button, which lets you place an arc redline onthe raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Arc, the Draw Arc dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Arrow (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Arrow command places a Draw Arrow button, which lets you place an arrowredline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Arrow, the Draw Arrow dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Block (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Block command places a Draw Block button, which lets you place an blockredline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Block, the Draw Block dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Circle (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Circle command places a Draw Circle button, which lets you place a circleredline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Circle, the Draw Circle dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Ellipse (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Ellipse command places a Draw Ellipse button, which lets you place a ellipseredline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Ellipse, the Draw Ellipse dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Filled Block (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Filled Block command places a Draw Filled Block button, which lets you placea filled block redline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Filled Block, the Draw Filled Block dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Filled Circle (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Filled Circle command places a Draw Filled Circle button, which lets youplace a filled circle redline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Filled Circle, the Draw Filled Circle dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Filled Ellipse (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Filled Ellipse command places a Draw Filled Ellipse button, which lets youplace a filled ellipse redline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Filled Ellipse, the Draw Filled Ellipse dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Filled Shape (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Filled Shape command places a Draw Filled Shape button, which lets youplace a filled shape redline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Filled Shape, the Draw Filled Shape dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Freehand (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Freehand command places a Draw Freehand button, which lets you freehandredlines on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Freehand, the Draw Freehand dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Line (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Line command places a Draw Line button, which lets you place a line redline onthe raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Line, the Draw Line dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Shape (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Shape command places a Draw Shape button, which lets you place an shaperedline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Shape, the Draw Shape dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Symbol (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Symbol command places a Draw Symbol button, which lets you place ansymbol redline on the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Symbol, the Draw Symbol dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Draw Text (Dialog Builder)

The Draw Text command places a Draw Text button, which lets you place an text redlineon the raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Draw Text, the Draw Text dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Drop From Group (Dialog Builder)

The Drop From Group command lets you drop a gadget from an existing group.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Drop Table (Schema Edit)

The Drop Table command lets you drop a table from a specified schema. All data in thetable and any associated indexes are deleted.

Dialog Options

When you select Drop Table, the Drop Table dialog appears.

Schema — This field specifies the schema from which the table is dropped. You canenter a new schema name using key in or the list indicator.

Table — This field specifies the table you want to drop. You can enter a new tablename using key in or the list indicator.

Drop Table — This button removes the table from the schema along with all data inthe table and any associated indexes.

The Drop Table command may fail if any views exist which reference thetable.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Dump Template

Dialog Builder:

Report Builder:

The Dump Template command provides an ASCII dump of a report or dialog template file.The file contains general information about the report or dialog. It also contains specificinformation about lines and columns.

The dump is a debugging tool showing such things as field size and type, sorts, printconditions, and other details associated with a report template. Any errors that DB Accessdetects are reported on the Errors Detected dialog when the template is dumped.


Dialog Options

When you select Dump Template, the Dump Template dialog appears.

Filename — This field specifies the filename for the template dump. You can key inthe full or relative pathname. Any file with the same name is overwritten.

DB Access Commands E - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Code (Database Edit)

The Edit Code command lets you display, edit, and insert values in a code list. You can alsoselect a code list value for a coded column in the current row.

You can use coded columns to limit the values that are valid for a column. A coded columnaccepts only data that is contained in a code list, a unique set of values stored in a join table.A join table can contain more than one code list.

Coded columns are indicated by a (c) to the left of the column name on theDatabase Edit dialog. In the following example, the coded column region hasbeen added to the manufacturer table. By default, the code list value generatedfor slot one is *UNK*, which stands for unknown.

E - 2 DB Access Commands

Dialog Options

When you select a coded column and Edit Code, the Edit Code dialog appears.

<column> Code List - n Slot(s) — This text string displays the name of the codedcolumn. n is the number of values contained in the code list.

Code List Values — This field lists the code column and text column values for thecode list.

Add Code Slot — This button lets you add slots to the code list. When you add a codelist slot, you add a row in the join table that contains the code list. The code slotnumber is contained in the code column and the value you enter is contained in the textcolumn.

Edit/Select — This toggle lets you place the code list field in edit mode (dark gray) orselect mode (light gray).

— When the field is in edit mode, you can edit code list values or add new slots.

— When the field is in select mode, you can select a code list value to insert in thecoded column for the current row.


You must have created a coded column in a database table, or you must be using anIntergraph application that supports coded columns.

The table you add code list values to must have a means of unique row identification (mslink,mscatalog.key_columns, or unique index). For more information, see the section DB AccessReserved Tables.


Operating Sequence

1. Select the column field for a coded column.

2. Select Edit Code.

The Edit Code dialog appears, displaying the code list for the coded column. If you haveselected a new coded column, the code list contains only the *UNK* value.

3. Add a new value to the code list.

a. Select Add Code Slot.

A new code slot is inserted. The cursor appears in the text field for the new codeslot.

b. Key in the value you want to add to the code list.

The code list value is added. The join table is updated to include the new codecolumn and text column values.

4. Repeat Step 3 to add other code list entries.

— OR —

Select Cancel to dismiss the Edit Code dialog.

Deleting Code List Slots

To delete slots from a code list, you must delete the associated rows from the join table thatcontains the code list values. If you insert a row for the join table into the mscatalog table,you can use Database Edit to delete join table rows.

Using Database Edit to add code list slots is not recommended. You should use the EditCode dialog to add code list slots.


DB Access stores code lists in memory. Any changes made to the code list

outside of the Edit Code dialog are not recognized until you exit and reinvokeDB Access or rebuild the code list by calling the script functiondba_flush_schema or dba_flush_codelist.

Entering Code List Values for a Row

Once you have established a code list for a coded column, you can use the code list values toedit rows in the attached database. You can enter code-list values in the following ways:

1. Select a coded column in the current row and key in:

#n#

where n is the code slot number. The corresponding text value is entered for thecolumn.

2. Select the coded column and key in a valid text column value.

3. Select the coded column and select Edit Code. Set the Edit/Select toggle to Select.Select a value from the Edit Code dialog. The code list value is added to the currentrow.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Code (Dialog Builder)

The Edit Code command places an Edit Code button, which lets you display and selectfrom the code list associated with a coded column. You can also let the user edit and insertcode list values.

Code lists are used in many Intergraph applications to limit the number of valid values for acolumn field. You can set up coded columns with the Create/Alter Table function in theSchema Edit utility. See sections DB Access Reserved Tables.


Dialog Options

When you select Edit Code, the Edit Code dialog appears.

Edit Allowed/No Edit Allowed — This toggle lets you grant or deny edit privilegeson the code list to users. If you select Edit Allowed, the user can display and selectfrom the code list, edit code list values, and insert new values. If you select No EditAllowed, the user can only display and select from the code list.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Dialog Parameters (Dialog Builder)

The Edit Dialog Parameters command lets you modify certain parameters for the currentdialog.

Dialog Options

When you select Edit Dialog Parameters, the Edit Dialog Parameters dialog appears.


Database Hook — This toggle is set to Database if the dialog is associated with atable in a database. Otherwise, the dialog does not represent any table, or representsthe current table.

The Schema and Table fields are active only if the Database setting isselected.

Schema — This field specifies the schema which contains the table associated with thedialog. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a newschema.

Table — This field specifies the table associated with the dialog. You can key in a newtable name or use the list indicator to select a new table.

Relations — This field specifies a Relations Template to be associated with this dialog,to satisfy secondary table column fields. For more information see Edit Relations.

Name — This field specifies the current dialog name. To rename the current dialog,key in a maximum of 20 characters with no embedded spaces.

Description — This field specifies a description of the dialog. To change thedescription, key in up to 50 characters.

Order Columns — This field lets you determine the order in which rows are displayed.Key in a comma-delimited list of columns. You can specify ascending (ASC) ordescending (DESC) order for each column. Ascending is the default.

In the dialog shown, for example, the order clause mfr_name ASC, price DESC wouldorder the rows in ascending order by manufacturer name and, for each manufacturer,in descending order by price.

Dialog Script — This field lets you specify a script to be associated with the dialog.You can key in a supported DB Access script, key in the name of a valid script template,or use the list indicator to select a script template from the current template library.

This script is executed whenever the dialog appears. If you want thescript to be executed only once, include logic to abort after processing once.

Notify Script — This field lets you specify a script to be processed whenever input ismade to the dialog operation. You can key in a supported DB Access script, key in thename of a valid script template, or use the list indicator to select a script template fromthe current template library.

Location — This group of gadgets determines the origin, width, and height for thecurrent dialog. Screen pixels are the units of measurement for any location key-in inDialog Builder.

To resize a dialog, you can use either the standard windowModify/Resize icon or key in new coordinates in the Location fields.


— X Origin — This field displays the x coordinate for the upper left corner of the

dialog.

— Y Origin — This field displays the y coordinate for the upper left corner of thedialog.

— Width — This field displays the width of the dialog in screen pixels.

— Height — This field displays the height of the dialog in screen pixels.

Scaling — This checkbox determines whether automatic scaling is employed if youresize the dialog. If scaling is ON, text and gadgets are scaled proportionally if youchange the size of the dialog. If scaling is OFF, text and gadgets remain the same sizeif a user resizes the dialog. Scaling is applicable only when the Resizing toggle is setto ON the dialog is resize.

Resizing — This checkbox determines whether users you can resize the dialog duringruntime. If resizing is ON, the size of the dialog can be changed with the standardwindow Modify/Resize icon. If resizing is OFF, you cannot change the size of thedialog.

CR Required — This checkbox determines whether a Carraige Return is requiredbefore input to a text box on the dialog is processed.

Cancel Children — This checkbox when set causes all dialogs displayed from thisdialog to be cancelled when this dialog is cancelled.

Application Modal — This checkbox when set, forces the user to process this dialogbefore input is accepted to any other dialog.

Color — This button calls a color dialog which lets you choose the background color forthe dialog.

Start Gadget — This field lets you specify which gadget is current when the dialog isdisplayed.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit Dialog Parameter from the Dialog Builder dialog.

The Edit Dialog Parameters dialog appears.

2. Modify any of the displayed values. Select OK to implement the changes.

— OR —

Select Cancel to retain the original values.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Field

The Edit Field command lets you edit parameters associated with a field on a reporttemplate. The type of field you select determines which parameters can be edited.

To save changes made to the field, you must save the template. See the sectionSave Report.

When you select Edit Field and a field, the dialog used to place that field appears. Forexample, if you select a text field, the Text Field dialog appears.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field and Edit from the pulldown menus.

The prompt Select Field appears.

2. Select the field you want to edit.

The dialog used to place the field appears.

3. Edit any available parameters you want to change.

4. Select OK.

The field is updated in the report template.

— OR —

Select Cancel to end the edit.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Gadget (Dialog Builder)

The Edit Gadget (Dialog Builder) command lets you edit parameters associated with agadget on a dialog template. You can edit any gadget placed with a Place Gadget (DialogBuilder) command. The type of gadget you select determines which parameters can beedited.

When you select Edit Gadget and a gadget, the dialog used to place that gadget appears.For example, if you select a Process Query button, the Process Query dialog displays.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and then Edit from the pulldownmenus.


2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) on the currentdialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget (obtained by selecting the DisplayLabels command from the Dialog Builder menu panel). The gadget highlights, and theprompt Accept/reject gadget appears.

— OR —


3. To accept the gadget, tap the left mouse button or press Return.

The dialog used to place the gadget appears.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget you chose. Return to Step 2.



5. Select OK.

The gadget is updated in the dialog template.

— OR —


You must save the dialog template to the attached template library for theedit to be saved permanently. For more information, see the section: SaveDialog (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Line

The Edit Line command lets you edit the parameters for lines in a report template. You canmodify line type, print conditions, table information, and other parameters.

To save changes made to a line, you must save the template. See the sectionSave Report.

Dialog Options

When you select Edit Line and a line, the Edit Line dialog appears.

Single table/All tables — These radio buttons specify whether the line is processedagainst a specific (single) table or against all tables in the attached database. SelectAll tables for common lines (such as page headings) in an unrelated tables report.Select Single table for all other report lines.


You cannot place column or numeric fields on All table lines.

Schema — This field specifies the schema which contains the table associated with theline. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a newschema.

This field is labeled Structure for userdata and ASCII reports.

Table — This field specifies the table associated with the line. You can key in a newtable name or use the list indicator to select a new table.

The Schema and Table fields are active only if the Single table settingis selected.

Line Type — This checklist specifies the current line type.

— Preface — These lines print once at the beginning of a report. After all prefacelines are printed, the report continues on a new page. You can use preface lines toprint a cover sheet, title page, or legend.

— Top — These lines print once at the top of every page. Page headings, columnheadings, date, time, and page number are included in the top lines of defaultreports created with the Load Default command.

— Body — These lines print once for every row in the input universe. They usuallycontain column fields.

— Bottom — These lines print once at the bottom of every page. Page numbers orfootnotes can be printed with bottom lines.

— Final — These lines print once at the end of the report. You can use final lines toprint report summaries or report totals.

Blank Lines Before — This field specifies the number of blank lines that print beforethe line.

Blank Lines After — This field specifies the number of blank lines that print after theline.

Print Condition — This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for the lineto print. If Print Condition is blank, the line is always printed.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Line and Edit from the pulldown menus.

The prompt Select Line appears.


2. Select the line you want to edit.

The Edit Line dialog appears, displaying the values for the selected line.


4. Select OK.

The line is updated in the report template.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Privileges (Schema Edit)

The Edit Privileges command lets you grant or revoke privileges for available RIS schemas.DB Access uses the information you provide on the Edit Privileges dialog to build SQL grantor revoke statements. For information on privilege types or SQL statement syntax, see theRelational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual.

Granting and revoking access on a relation through RIS affects only RIS.Privileges on the underlying database system are not affected.

Dialog Options

When you select Edit Privileges, the Edit Privileges dialog appears.

Table Privileges — This area contains gadgets for granting or revoking tableprivileges.


— Grant Privilege. This button grants table privileges to one or more schemas.

Specify the schemas and the privileges before selecting Grant Privilege.

— Revoke Privilege. This button revokes table privileges from schemas. Specify theschemas and the privileges before selecting Revoke Privilege.

— Schema. This field specifies the schema that contains the tables for which you aregranting or revoking privileges.

— Tables. This field lists the tables in the specified schema. Select the tables forwhich you are granting/revoking privileges.

— Schemas to Grant Privileges to. This field lists the schemas in the schema list.Select the schemas to which you are granting or from which you are revokingprivileges.

— Privileges. This checklist lets you select the privileges to grant or revoke.

— Grant Option. This toggle specifies whether the schema being granted privilegescan grant privileges to other schemas. A schema can grant only those privilegesgranted to it.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Query (Database Edit)

The Edit Query command lets you review, edit, or save the current query criteria, or load aquery template from a template library.

Dialog Options

When you select Edit Query, the Edit Query dialog appears.

Schema — This field specifies the schema containing the table for which the query iscreated. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a newschema.

Table — This field specifies the table to be searched for column values matching thequery criteria. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a newtable.

Query — This key-in field displays the current query (if any). You can edit the queryor key in a new query.

Load Query — This button calls the Load From Library dialog, which lets you loada query criteria template. For more information, see the section Load From Library.

Save Query — This button calls the Save Template dialog, which lets you save aquery criteria template. For a description of this dialog, see the section Save Options.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Query (Dialog Builder)

The Edit Query command places an Edit Query button, which displays an Edit Querydialog. From the dialog you can view, edit, and save the current query criteria, or load aquery template from the attached template library.

Dialog Options

When you select Edit Query, the Edit Query dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Edit Report Parameters

The Edit Report Parameters command lets you modify certain parameters for the currentreport template.

Dialog Options

When you select Edit Report Parameters, the Edit Report Parameters dialog appears.

Single table/Unrelated tables — This toggle lets you specify whether the report is asingle table or an unrelated tables report.


— Select Single table to specify a table that is the only table reported on or that is the

primary table in a join columns operation.

— Select Unrelated tables when you want to report on tables that do not share a joincolumn.


Schema — This field specifies the schema which contains the table associated with thereport. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a newschema.

This field is labeled Structure for user data and ASCII reports.

Table — This field specifies the table associated with the report. You can key in a newtable name or use the list indicator to select a new table.

Type — This checklist specifies the current template type (Database, Userdata,ASCII, or Binary).

Name — This field specifies the current report template name. To rename thetemplate, key in a maximum of 20 characters with no embedded spaces.

Description — This field specifies a description of the template. To change thedescription, key in up to 50 characters.

Output — This field displays the default output filename. Key in up to 50 charactersto name a different output file.

If the output filename is stdout, no file is created. The report output issent to the DB Access standard output device which, by default, is theinvoking window.

Characters Per Line — This field displays the page width. Key in a number from 1to 2000.

You can edit templates that are wider than the screen by using the ShiftLeft and Shift Right arrows at the bottom of the Report Builder dialog.

Lines Per Page — This field specifies when page breaks occur. Key in a number from0 to 999. (0 creates a file without page breaks.)

Relations — This field specifies a Relations Template to be associated with this dialog,to satisfy secondary table column fields. For more information, see Edit Relations.

It is not possible to switch from Report Scripting to User Action.Report Scripting is the recommended interpreter.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Erase Fence (Raster Graphics)

The Erase Fence command erases the selected fence in the raster image in the specifiedwindow. To use the command, select Erase Fence and then a window.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Exit

The Exit command is available in several places in DB Access.

To Exit the Dialog Builder

Select Exit from the Dialog Builder menu bar.

If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Dialog dialog is called, whichlets you write the current dialog template before leaving Dialog Builder. Seethe section Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) for information on using this dialog.

You are returned to the Program Manager Window.

To Exit the Report Builder


Select Exit from the Report Builder menu bar.

If you have modified the current report template, the Save Report dialog iscalled, which lets you write the current report template before loading anotherfrom the template library. See the section Save Report for information on usingthis dialog.

You are returned to the Program Manager Window.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Expanded Summary (Dialog Builder)

The Expanded Summary command displays a listing of the gadgets on the current dialog.All of the gadget parameters except the gadget label can be edited from the ExpandedSummary dialog.

Dialog Options

When you select Expanded Summary, the Expanded Summary dialog appears.


Operating Sequence

1. Select Options on the Toolbar menu. Select Expanded Summary from thepulldown menu.

The Expanded Summary dialog appears.

2. Edit any parameters you choose. (Editable parameters become active when selected.)

3. Select Close when finished.

DB Access Commands F - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fence Block (Raster Graphics)

The Fence Block command lets you select a portion of the raster image in the specifiedwindow. To use the command, select Fence Block and then a window.

F - 2 DB Access Commands

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fence Copy (Dialog Builder)

The Fence Copy (Dialog Builder) command copies a fenced area on the current dialog oneor more times.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit on the Toolbar menu. Select Fence and Copy on the pulldown menus.

The prompt Select fence origin appears.

2. Click the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that encompasses thegroup of gadgets you want to copy.

The prompt Select opposite corner appears.

— OR —


3. Click the left mouse button to define the opposite corner of the fence.

The gadgets within the boundaries of the fence highlight, and the prompt Accept/rejectfence appears.

4. Click the left mouse button to accept the fence.

The fence attaches to the cursor in drag mode. The prompt Select placement pointappears.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the fence. Return to Step 2.



The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the fenced area onthe dialog.


A copy of the fenced area is placed at the new location.

7. Return to Step 5 to place another copy of the gadget in a new location.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to define a new fenced area to copy. Return to Step 2.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fence Delete (Dialog Builder)

The Fence Delete (Dialog Builder) command deletes a fenced area containing multiplegadgets on the displayed dialog. You define a fenced area by placing a data point in theupper left corner of the area (the fence origin) and another in the lower right corner.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Edit and Delete from the pulldownmenus.

2. Tap the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that encompasses thegadgets you want to delete.

— OR —



The gadgets within the fence highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject fence appears.


The gadgets within the fence are deleted.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the fence.

The gadgets within the fence are not deleted.


5. Return to Step 2 to define another fence.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fence Edit (Dialog Builder)

The Fence Edit (Dialog Builder) command lets you edit parameters associated withgadget labels in a fenced area.

Dialog Options

When you select Fence Edit (Dialog Builder), the Fence/Group Edit dialog appears.

Choose Font — This button calls the Font dialog, which is described in the followingsection.

Font — Select this box to implement a change in the font. If the box is not selected, thegadget labels retain their current font.

Font Style — Select this box to implement a change in the font style. If the box is notselected, the gadget labels retain their current font style.

Size — Select this box to implement a change in the size of the type. If the box is notselected, the gadget labels retain their current size.


Choose Font

Font — This field displays the current style of type. You can key in a new typeface orselect one from the list below.

Font Style — This field displays the current font style. You can select a new font stylefrom the list below.

Size — This field displays the current size of type. You can key in a new bodysize orselect one from the list below.

Sample Type — This field displays an example of the current font.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Fence and Edit from the pulldown menus.


2. Click the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that encompass thegroup of gadgets whose labels you want to edit.


— OR —


3. Click the middle mouse button to define the opposite corner of the fence.




The Fence/Group Edit dialog appears.

— OR —



6. Select OK.

The gadgets are updated.

— OR —


You must save the dialog template to the attached template library for theedit to be saved permanently with the template. See the section SaveDialog (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fence Move (Dialog Builder)

The Fence Move (Dialog Builder) command moves a fenced area containing multiplegadgets.

You define a fenced area by placing a data point in the upper left corner of the area (the fenceorigin) and another in the lower right corner. The fenced area attaches to the cursor in dragmode, letting you move the fenced area interactively on the dialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Fence and Move from the pulldownmenus.


2. Click the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that will encompass thegroup of gadgets you want to move.


— OR —






The fence attaches to the cursor in drag mode.

— OR —


5. Move the fence to a new location on the dialog.

The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the fenced gadgets onthe dialog.


The fenced gadgets are placed at a new location on the dialog.

7. Return to Step 2.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fence Operations (Dialog Builder)

The Fence Operations (Report Builder) command calls the following panel:

The Fence Operations (Dialog Builder) command contains the edit, copy, move, deleteand undelete functions on the pulldown menu. Because a fenced area can contain anynumber of gadgets, fence operations are useful for executing the same command on severalgadgets.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Fence Operations (Dialog Builder) from the Dialog Builder menu bar.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fence Shape (Raster Graphics)

The Fence Shape command lets you select a portion of the raster image in the specifiedwindow. To use the command, select Fence Shape and then a window.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Field Format (Report Builder)

The Field Format command lets you associate a format with a field in a report template.The format modifies the field as it is printed out to the report.

You must save the report template to save the field formats you haveestablished.

Dialog Options

When you select Field Format and select the field to format, the DBA Special FieldFormats dialog for that field appears.


Convert to Feet - Inches — This option converts a numeric field to feet and inchesformat. The initial field is assumed to be in inches. For example, if a wall length isstored in a database as 136.75 inches, the formatted field prints the report output as11’-4 3/4". If a field is not stored as inches in the input data, it is usually easier toconvert it to inches (by way of a derived field) and then use the field format rather thanconvert it to a feet-inches format.

Convert to Fraction — This option converts a floating point field to a fraction. Forexample, a 136.75 inch wall length is printed as 136 3/4. Fractions are rounded to thenearest 1/8th.

Variable Start — This option prints the field in the column represented by an integeruser variable. Select this format to stagger the start of report fields according to apredetermined value or condition.

— User Variable. This field lets you specify the user variable that contains theinteger value.

Suppress — This option suppresses the number of blanks between two fields. SelectSuppress for the second of two fields to define the number of blanks between the end ofthe data in the first field and the start of the second field.

Select this option for fields that should print with only one or two blanks between them,regardless of the length of their text. For example:

Last_name, First_name or City, State Zip_Code

You can also use Suppress to create a free format file to be used as input for anotherprocess.

— Blanks. This field lets you specify the number of blanks inserted before the field.

Zero Fill — This option replaces leading blanks in a numeric field with zeros. Bydefault, DB Access does not print leading zeros in a numeric field.

Auto Wrap — This option automatically wraps lengthy text in a field to a second linein the report output. You must specify a field length on the report template that isshorter than the length of the associated column. The text is broken at the last blankbefore the specified field length.

Justification Format — This checklist lets you specify how the field is aligned. SelectRight Justify, Center Justify, or Left Justify.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fields On/Off (Database Edit)

The Fields On/Off command toggles all column fields off or on. You can turn an individualfield on or off by selecting the field’s corresponding column name (for example, part_num,mfr_name, and so on).

By default, all column fields on the Database Edit dialog are on (the field is dark gray). Offfields (light gray) are not included in universe reviews.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fields On/Off (Dialog Builder)

The Fields On/Off command places a Fields On/Off button, which toggles all column fieldson or off. (Off fields are not included in universe reviews generated by the Review button).

Dialog Options

When you select Fields On/Off, the Fields On/Off dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Field Operations (Report Builder)

The Field Operations (Report Builder) command calls the following panel:

The Field Operations (Report Builder) command contains the edit, copy, move, delete,and undelete functions on the pulldown menu to field commands from line commands.

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field from the pulldown menu.

2. Select the command that you want to execute.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Field Plus (Dialog Builder)

The Field Plus command places a field plus on the current dialog. A Field Plus gadget is acustom control that offers I/Forms functionality.

Dialog Options

When you select Field Plus, the Field PLUS dialog appears.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fit View (Dialog Builder)

The Fit View command places a Fit View button, which displays an entire raster documentin the specified window.

Dialog Options

When you select Fit View, the Fit View dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fit (Raster Graphics)

The Fit command displays an entire raster document in the specified window. To use thecommand, select Fit and then a window.

DB Access Commands G - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Gadget Groups (Dialog Builder)

Grouping gadgets make it easier to change their attributes with a single FI script function ora single Dialog Builder command. The Gadget Groups command calls the following panelof gadget group commands:

Create/Edit — This command lets you create and edit gadget groups. See the sectionCreate/Edit Group (Dialog Builder).

Drop From — This command lets you drop a gadget from a group. See the sectionDrop From Group (Dialog Builder).

Delete — This command lets you delete the group status of a gadget group. See thesection Delete Group (Dialog Builder).

Show — This button lets you highlight all the gadgets in a given group. See thesection Show Group (Dialog Builder).

G - 2 DB Access Commands

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder)

The Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder) command calls the following panel:

The Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder) commands contains the edit, copy, move, deleteand undelete functions on the pulldown menu.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget from the pulldown menu.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Gadget Sequencing (Dialog Builder)

The Gadget Sequencing command calls the following palette:

Create — This button lets you define a sequence for users to follow. See the sectionCreate Sequence (Dialog Builder).

Review — This button lets you review an existing sequence. See the section ReviewSequence (Dialog Builder).

Delete — This button lets you delete linkages in an existing sequence. See the sectionDelete Sequence (Dialog Builder).

Auto — This button automatically sequences non-coded single column fields and userfields. See the section Auto Sequence (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Gauge (Dialog Builder)

The Gauge command places a gauge with a range of values to be used with a particularcommand.

Dialog Options

When you select Gauge, the Gauge dialog appears.


High Value — Defines the highest value appearing on the gauge.

Initial Value — Defines the initial value appearing on the gauge.

Vertical/Horizontal — Determines the direction the gauge moves.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________General Utilities (Dialog Builder)

The General Utilities command calls a menu panel that lets you place gadgets to performsuch functions as executing a system command or exiting a dialog.

Cancel — This button places a Cancel button, which exits you from the current dialogor cancels a process. See the section Cancel (Dialog Builder).

Display Dialog — This button places a Display Dialog button, which displays adialog that you specify. See the section Display Dialog (Dialog Builder).

Display Group — This button places a Display Group button, which displays agroup of undisplayed gadgets. See the section Display Group (Dialog Builder).

Document List — This button places a Document List field, which generates a list offiles on which you can execute commands. See the section Document List (DialogBuilder).

Multi Gadget — This button lets you associate multiple commands with one functionbutton. Thus, you can place one button that performs several functions in succession.See the section Multi Gadget (Dialog Builder).

Help — This button places a Help button, which invokes on-line Help. See the sectionHelp (Dialog Builder).

System Command — This button lets you place a System Command button, whichexecutes a system command. See the section System Command (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Grid (Dialog Builder)

The Grid command places a grid on the current dialog, for multi-column text selection.

Dialog Options

When you select Grid, the Grid dialog appears.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Grid Lock (Dialog Builder)

The Grid Lock command lets you specify a grid lock number used in placing gadgets by datapoint. The gadgets are forced to the nearest screen pixel coordinate that is a multiple of thegrid lock number. For example, if you set the grid lock number to 10, gadgets placed by datapoint are forced to x and y coordinates that are multiples of 10.

The grid lock setting can be saved as part of a design options template, using the SaveOptions command.

The grid lock is also used by the Snap to Grid command.

Dialog Options

When you select Grid Lock, the Grid Lock dialog appears.


Operating Sequence

1. Select Options from the Toolbar menu, then select Grid Lock... from the pulldownmenu.

The Grid Lock dialog appears.

2. Position the cursor on top of the slider, hold down the middle mouse button, and movethe cursor right to make the grid lock number larger or left to make the grid locknumber smaller.

— OR —

Enter a value for the grid lock number in the key-in field.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Group Box (Dialog Builder)

The Group Box command places a group box on the current dialog, to group a set of like-functioned gadgets.

Dialog Options

When you select Group Box, the Group Box dialog appears.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Group Copy (Dialog Builder)

The Group Copy (Dialog Builder) command copies a gadget group on the current dialogone or more times.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and then Copy from the pulldownmenus.


2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) in the group youare copying on the current dialog or key in the numeric label of any gadget in the group(obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menupanel).


— OR —


3. To accept the gadget, Click the left mouse button or press Return>.

The gadgets in the gadget group highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject group appears.

4. Click the left mouse button to accept the gadget group.

The group attaches to the cursor in drag mode. The prompt Select placement pointappears.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the group. Return to Step 2.



The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the gadget group onthe dialog.

6. click the left mouse button.

A copy of the gadget group is placed at the new location.

7. Return to Step 5 to place another copy of the gadget group in a new location.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to define a new gadget group to copy. Return to Step 2.

— OR —

Double click the right mouse button to exit the command.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Group Delete (Dialog Builder)

The Group Delete (Dialog Builder) command deletes a gadget group on the currentdialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and then Delete from thepulldown menus.


2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) in the group youare deleting on the current dialog or key in the numeric label of any gadget in the group(obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menupanel).


— OR —





The gadget group is deleted.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget group.


The gadget group is not deleted.

5. Return to Step 2 to select another gadget group.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Group Edit (Dialog Builder)

The Group Edit (Dialog Builder) command lets you edit parameters associated with agadget group.

Dialog Options

When you select Group Edit (Dialog Builder), the Fence/Group Edit dialog appears.

Choose Font — This button calls the Font dialog, which is described in the followingsection.

Font — Select this box to implement a change in the font. If the box is not selected, thegadget labels retain their current font.

Font Style — Select this box to implement a change in the font style. If the box is notselected, the gadget labels retain their current font style.

Size — Select this box to implement a change in the size of the type. If the box is notselected, the gadget labels retain their current size.


Choose Font





Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and the Edit from the pulldownmenus.


2. Click the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that encompass thegroup of gadgets whose labels you want to edit.


— OR —






The Fence/Group Edit dialog appears.

— OR —



6. Select OK.

The gadget labels are updated.

— OR —


You must save the dialog template to the attached template library for theedit to be saved permanently with the template. See the section SaveDialog (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Group Move (Dialog Builder)

The Group Move (Dialog Builder) command moves a gadget group on the current dialogone or more times.

This command is also available from the DBA toolbar.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and then Move from the pulldownmenus.


2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) in the group youare moving on the current dialog or key in the numeric label of any gadget in the group(obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menupanel).


— OR —






The group attaches to the cursor in drag mode. The prompt Select placement pointappears.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the group. Return to Step 2.


The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the gadget group onthe dialog.


The gadget group is placed at the new location.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Group Operations (Dialog Builder)

The Group Operations (Dialog Builder) command calls the following panel:

The Group Operations (Dialog Builder) command contains edit, copy, move, delete, andundelete functions on the pulldown menu to group commands from gadget commands. Groupcommands perform operations on gadget groups.

Operating Sequence

Select Edit from the Toolbar menu and then select Group from the pulldown menu.

DB Access Commands H - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Help (Dialog Builder)

The Help command places a Help button, which invokes on-line Help.

Dialog Options

When you select Help, the Help dialog appears.


H - 2 DB Access Commands

Operating Sequence


DB Access Commands I - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Initialize Query (Database Edit)

The Initialize Query command clears the current query criteria. If you select InitializeQuery and then Process Query, a universe of all rows in the current table is generated.

I - 2 DB Access Commands

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Initialize Query (Dialog Builder)

The Initialize Query command places an Initialize Query button, which initializes(clears) the current query criteria.

Dialog Options

When you select Initialize Query, the Initialize Query dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Insert Row (Database Edit)

The Insert Row command inserts a new row in the attached database. The new rowcontains the column values currently displayed.

If there are no restrictions on duplicate column values in the database, you can use InsertRow to create a row that contains the same values as the current row. Only the mslinkvalue (if the column exists) is changed. DB Access automatically increments the mslinkvalue for each new row in the database.

Insert Row cannot create a new row if:

1. A column is a serial column (INFORMIX), a key column (defined in mscatalog), ordefines a unique index

— AND —

2. The column value for the new row is not unique.

The Update Active command lets you change currently displayed values for the row to beinserted without changing the corresponding value for the current row. For moreinformation, see the section Update Active (Database Edit).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Insert Row (Dialog Builder)

The Insert Row command places an Insert Row button, which inserts a new row based onthe column values for the displayed row. The user selects Update Active, enters data forthe new row, and then selects Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row in thedatabase.

Dialog Options

When you select Insert Row, the Insert Row dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Insert Space (Report Builder)

The Insert Space (Report Builder) command lets you insert spaces between fields in areport template. All fields to the right of the cursor are moved to the right.

You can use the Delete Field and Undelete Field commands to align fields onseveral lines. For more information, see these sections Delete Field andUndelete Field (Report Builder).

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu and then select Insert space from the pulldownmenu.

2. Place the cursor where you want to insert spaces. Click the left mouse button once foreach space.

Fields to the right of the cursor are moved right.

3. Insert spaces in a new location.

— OR —


DB Access Commands K - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Key Column (Database Edit)

The Key Column command lets you perform a quick search on the database. If you key in avalue for a column field, DB Access searches the database and retrieves the first row that hasthe same value for the column. This command provides the same functionality as anInitialize Query, Add Query, and Process Query sequence.

K - 2 DB Access Commands

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Key Column (Dialog Builder)

The Key Column command places a Key Column button, which lets you perform a quicksearch on the database. If you key in a value for a column field, DB Access searches thedatabase and retrieves the first row that has the same value for the column. This commandprovides the same functionality as an Initialize Query, Add Query, and Process Querysequence.

Dialog Options

When you select Key Column, the Key Column dialog appears.


DB Access Commands K - 3

Operating Sequence


K - 4 DB Access Commands

DB Access Commands L - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Line (Dialog Builder)

The Line command lets you place a line on the current dialog. You can select line style,color, depth, and weight. Lines are useful for drawing boundaries around groups of functionbuttons.

Dialog Options

When you select Line, the Line dialog appears.

The following list describes the options on the dialog.

Location — This group of gadgets determines the endpoints for the line. Screen pixelsare the units of measurement for any location key-in.

— Keyin/Data Point. This toggle lets you determine endpoints by keying in values orplacing data points.

— X1, Y1 – These fields let you key in the x and y coordinates for the origin of the line.

— X2, Y2 – These fields let you key in the x and y coordinates for the second endpoint.

Select Line Weight — This button calls a dialog that lets you specify a line weight forthe line you are placing. Use the slider on the dialog to select an active line weight.

Select Line Style — This button calls a dialog that lets you specify a line style for theline you are placing. Select the checklist box next to the style you want to use.

L - 2 DB Access Commands

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Line Operations (Report Builder)

The Line Operations (Report Builder) command calls the following panels:

The Line Operations (Report Builder) command contains edit, copy, move, delete, andundelete functions on the pulldown menu to line commands from field commands.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Line Operations (Report Builder) from the Dialog Builder menu bar.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Line Script

The Line Script command lets you write more complex statements for a report template toprocess. Line scripts can perform looping, if-else-if structures, paging, multiple calculations,and other report control functions.

You can define scripts to process before or after a line in a report template is printed. If theline is not printed, the after line script does not process. Scripts can also be processed beforeor after a sort of the input data.

Line Script does not require a function name or opening and closing braces.

A line script cannot include a preprocessor directive, such as #include or #define, becauseReport Scripting treats each line script as one long line of C code.


Dialog Options

When you select Line Script, the Line Script dialog appears.

Before Line Processing — This field lets you specify line scripts to process before theline is printed. If you select a line with an existing before line script, the script appearsin this field. Select the Clear button to clear the field.

After Line Processing — This field lets you specify line scripts to process after theline is printed. If you select a line with an existing after line script, the script appearsin this field. Select the Clear button to clear the field.

If the line is not printed, the after line script does not process.

When the Line Script dialog appears, these fields are in edit mode.Select a field to key in a script or edit an existing one.

Editor — This button lets you use a specified editor to edit the text in the last activefield. You can specify an editor with the EDITOR environment variable. If EDITOR isnot defined, notepad is the default editor.

— The name of the current editor appears in the field to the right of the Editor button.To change editors, key in the name of the new editor.



The Line Script command appears on the Report Builder panel dialog if the Interpretertoggle on the Edit Report Parameters dialog is set to Report Scripting.

You must define user variables before using them in line scripts.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Links Commands (Dialog Builder)

The Links Commands command calls the following panel:

Review Element — This button places a Review Element button, which reviews thelinkage(s) for a graphic element in a design or raster file. See the section ReviewElement (Dialog Builder).

Locate Graphics — This button places a Locate Graphics button, which locates agraphic element with a linkage to the current row on a DB Access dialog. The graphicelement highlights if a linkage exists. See the section Locate Graphics (Dialog Builder).

Attach Linkage — This button places an Attach Linkage button, which creates alinkage between the current row on a DB Access dialog and a graphic element. See thesection Attach DB Linkage (Dialog Builder).

Attach DAP Link — This button places an Attach DAP Link button, which attachesa linkage from the current row to a text node in a design file. See the section AttachDAP Link (Dialog Builder).

Attach Note Link — This button places an Attach Note Link button, which attachesa linkage from a raster element to a text file. See the section Attach Note Link (DialogBuilder).

Attach File Link — This button places an Attach File Link button, which linksraster elements in the same file or different files. See the section Attach File Link(Dialog Builder).

Show Links — This button places a Show Links button, which displays linkages inthe specified window. See the section Show Links (Dialog Builder).


Linkage Mode — This button places a Linkage Mode field, which lets a user selectthe type of database linkage created with the Attach Linkage button. See the sectionLinkage Mode (Dialog Builder).

Remove Linkage — This button places a Remove Linkage button, which removes alinkage from a graphic element. See the section Remove Linkage (Dialog Builder).

Remove Fence — This button places a Remove Fence button, which removes thelinkage(s) on any graphic elements contained within a fence defined by the user. Seethe section Remove Fence (Dialog Builder).

USTN Command — This button places a Microstation Key-in button, which lets youassociate a MicroStation key-in command with the button. When the button is selected,MicroStation receives and executes the associated command. See the section USTNCommand (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Linkage Mode (Dialog Builder)

The Linkage Mode command places a Linkage Mode field, which lets a user select thetype of linkage created with Attach Linkage. See the section Attach DB Linkage (DatabaseEdit).

Dialog Options

When you select Linkage Mode, the Linkage Mode dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________List Box (Dialog Builder)

The List Box command places a list box on the current dialog, for text selection.

Dialog Options

When you select List Box, the List Box dialog appears.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Load File (Dialog Builder)

The Load File command places a Load File button, which displays the specified raster file.

Dialog Options

When you select Load File, the Load File dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Load File (Raster Graphics)

The Load File command lets you display a raster file. Any DM/View supported format canbe displayed. The file must be local or NFS mounted.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Load From Library

The Load From Library command calls the DBA Load From Library dialog, which liststhe templates found in the current template library. Your location within DB Access (DialogBuilder, Report Builder, and so on) determines the type of template that is listed.

For information about the types of templates that can be loaded from a template library, seethe section Templates.

Dialog Options

When you select Load From Library, the Load From Library dialog appears.

Library — This field displays the name of the current template library. To change thename, select the field, clear the field, and key in a new name.

Template — This field displays the name of the current template. To change thename, select the field, clear the field, and key in a new name.

Type — This field displays the type of template. To change the type, select the field,and either key in a new type or select one from the list.


Load — This button places the dialog in Load Template mode. Select this button ifyou want to load a template from the current library. To leave Load Template mode,select Load again or select one of the other buttons on the dialog.

Delete — This button places the dialog in Delete Template mode. Select this buttonif you want to delete a template from the current library. To leave Delete Templatemode, select Delete again or select one of the other buttons on the dialog.

Compress — This button compresses the contents of the current template library torecover space from deleted or replaced templates.

Name, Description, Type — This field lists the name, description, and type of thetemplates in the template library. You can select a template to be loaded or deletedfrom this list.

Most Recent — This field lists the most recently used templates in the templatelibrary. When a template is used it becomes the first in the list. The list is clearedafter each log-in. You can select templates from this field.

From Dialog Builder

1. Select Load From Library from the Dialog Builder menu bar.

If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Dialog dialog is called,which lets you write the current dialog template before loading anotherfrom the template library. See the section Save Dialog (Dialog Builder)for information on using this dialog.

The Load From Library dialog appears, displaying a list of the dialog templates inthe current library.

2. Continue with the steps listed in the following operating sequence.

From Report Builder

1. Select Load From Library from the Report Builder menu bar.

If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Report dialog is called,which lets you write the current report template before loading anotherfrom the template library. See the section Save Report for information onusing this dialog.

The Load From Library dialog appears, displaying a list of the report templates in thecurrent library. Three types of report templates are listed: Database, ASCII, andUserdata.

2. Continue with the steps listed in the following operating sequence.


Operating Sequence

If you have not previously attached a template library, the Library fieldis blank and no templates are listed. Attach a template library byselecting the Library field and keying in the path to a valid templatelibrary file.

1. The Load function button should appear to be depressed, indicating that the dialog isin Load Template mode.

Select a template from the displayed list.

The specified template appears.

— OR —

Select Delete to enter Delete Template mode.

a. Select a template from the displayed list.

A dialog requesting confirmation of the deletion appears.

b. You have two options:

– Select Yes to delete the template.

The template is deleted from the library.

– Select No to abort the deletion.

— OR —

Select Compress to compress the contents of the current template library.

2. To exit the Load Template or Delete Template mode, select the function buttonagain or select a different button.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Locate Graphics (Database Edit)

The Locate Graphics command locates and highlights graphic elements with linkages tothe current row.

The Dialog Builder function lets you modify Locate Graphics to locateelements with linkages to the current universe, or to add the elements to aworking set for further manipulation. See the section Locate Graphics (DialogBuilder).


Load a design or raster file.

Make the row for which you want to locate linked graphic elements the current row.


1. Select Locate Graphics from the Database Edit dialog.

The message Processing, please wait... appears, followed by the prompt Select view.

— OR —

If no elements are found with a linkage to the current row, the message Element notfound appears, and DB Access exits the command.

2. Click the left mouse button in the view where you want the graphic element to display.

The element is centered in the view, and the prompt Point to hilite appears.

3. Click the left mouse button in the view.

The element is highlighted. DB Access exits the command.


1. Select Locate Graphics from the Database Edit dialog.

DB Access highlights the element, zooms in and centers it in the window, then exits thecommand.

— OR —

If no elements are found with a linkage to the current row, the message No linkagepresent appears. DB Access exits the command.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Locate Graphics (Dialog Builder)

The Locate Graphics command places a Locate Graphics button, which locates graphicelements with linkage(s) to the current row or current universe on a DB Access dialog.

Dialog Options

When you select Locate Graphics, the Locate Graphics dialog appears.

The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/PlaceSymbol, Text Font, Color, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (DialogBuilder) for a description of these options.

Current Row/Current Query — This toggle determines whether elements withlinkages to the current row or current universe are located.


Hilite/Working Set — Vector graphics: This toggle determines whether the locatedelements are highlighted or added to a working set. A working set is a group ofMicroStation elements that can be manipulated at one time using MicroStation fencecontents commands (move, change color, delete, and so forth).

Raster graphics: This toggle determines whether the located elements are highlightedor not.

Operating Sequence


DB Access Commands M - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Measure (Dialog Builder)

The Measure command places a Measure button, lets the user determine the distancebetween two points in a raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Measure, the Measure dialog appears.


M - 2 DB Access Commands

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Measure (Raster Graphics)

The Measure command lets you determine the distance between two points in a rasterimage.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Modify Sort

The Modify Sort command lets you modify the sort keys for a report template. Sort keysdefine the order in which input rows from the database are processed and output through areport template. A sort key can be a text string, a column in a table, or a field derived from acalculation.

You must save the report template to save the sort keys you define.

If you select the Line Script command while the Modify Sort dialog is displayed, you canspecify scripts or user action statements, respectively, to process before or after input data issorted. The Sort Script dialog functions the same as the Line Script dialog. See thesection Line Script.


Dialog Options

When you select Modify Sort, the DBA Modify Sort dialog appears.

Schema — This field specifies the schema containing the table in an unrelated tablesreport for which you want to define a sort key. You can key in a new schema name oruse the list indicator to select a new schema.

Table — This field specifies the table in an unrelated tables report for which you wantto define a sort key. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to selecta new table.

The Schema and Table fields are active only when you load an unrelatedtables report template.

Sort, Order, Sort Value, New Page — This select-only field lists the sort keys for thecurrent report.

Select a line to make it a marker (highlighted) line. The field cannot be in delete or editmode. (That is, the Delete and Edit buttons are not depressed.) New sort keys can beadded and the delete buffer inserted before a marker line.

Add — This button adds a sort key to the sort key list. Select Add after you enterinformation in the area at the bottom of the dialog. The new sort key is inserted beforethe marker line in the sort key list. If no marker line exists, the new sort key isinserted at the bottom of the list.


Edit — This button places the dialog in edit mode. Select Edit and then select a sortkey from the sort key list. The values for the sort key appear in the area at the bottomof the dialog. You can edit these values.

Delete — This button puts the dialog in delete mode; any line you select is deleted andstored in a delete buffer. The delete buffer stores deleted lines until you exit deletemode. Select Delete again to exit delete mode. The delete buffer is cleared wheneveryou enter delete mode.

Undelete — This button inserts the current delete buffer before the marker line in thesort key list. If no marker line exists, the delete buffer is inserted at the bottom of thelist.

Clear Select — This button clears the currently selected sort key, so that newly addedsort keys go to the bottom of the list. Otherwise, new sort keys are placed before thecurrent sort key.

Sort Type — This checklist lets you select the type of sort.

— Text — This option sorts the input rows by a text string you key in. You can usetext sort keys with unrelated tables reports to specify which table’s data should besorted first. For the table containing the rows to sort first, specify a string whichalphabetically precedes the string for the table containing the rows to sort second.

For example, for the unrelated tables Table A and Table B, make sort key 1 a textsort for both tables. To sort the Table A rows first, key in the text string 1 for TableA and 2 for Table B.

– Text — This field lets you specify the text string for a text sort.

— Column — This option sorts rows according to the values for a specified column inthe database.

– Schema — This field specifies the schema containing the column by which youwant to sort. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator toselect a new schema.

– Table — This field specifies the table containing the column by which you wantto sort. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a newtable.

– Column — This field specifies the column containing the values by which youwant to sort. You can key in a new column name or use the list indicator toselect a new column.

– Join Columns — This button lets you review and edit the join columnrelationship. The button is inactive until join columns are specified.

If you define sort keys for columns from more than one table on a single tablereport, you must specify a join column between the primary table and thesecondary table. See the section Join Columns.


– Code Text/Number — This toggle lets you specify whether a coded column sort

is by the code_number or code_text. This toggle is inactive until a coded columnis specified in the Column field.

— Derived — This option sorts input data according to the result of a formula. Youcan sort input rows based on a calculated value that is not represented by a columnin the database.

– Formula — This field lets you specify a formula, which can include columns,constants, and user variables. Because it is not tied to a line in the reporttemplate, a derived sort key cannot reference fields (f_1, f_2, and so on).

Length — This field specifies the number of characters used in the sort key. If thelength were set to 2, the values ABCD and ABZZZZ would be equivalent during thesort.

Sort Order — This checklist lets you select the order in which rows are sorted.

— Ascending — This option orders rows in alphabetical or numerical order:A,A,B,C,C,D or 1,1,2,2,3.

— Descending — This option orders rows in reverse alphabetical or numerical order:D,C,C,B,A,A or 3,2,2,1,1.

— None — This option does not sort the rows. However, sort breaks (system variablesthat indicate when a sort value changes) can still be used.

New Page — This checklist lets you select whether a page break is inserted into thereport when the value of the sort key changes.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Move Field

The Move Field command moves a field on a report template.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field and then Move from the pulldownmenus.

The prompt Select field appears.

2. Select a field on the report template.

The field is dynamically attached to the cursor.

The prompt Select placement point appears.

3. Move the field to a new location on the report template.




DB Access moves the field to the new position.

5. Move the field to another position.

— OR —



— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Move Gadget (Dialog Builder)

The Move Gadget (Dialog Builder) command moves a gadget on the current dialog. Thegadget attaches to the cursor in drag mode, letting you move the gadget interactively on thedialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and then Move from the pulldownmenus.


2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) on the currentdialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget (obtained by selecting the DisplayLabels command from the Dialog Builder panel menu).


— OR —



The gadget attaches to the cursor in drag mode.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget. Return to Step 2.


4. Move the gadget to a new location on the dialog.

The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the gadget on thedialog.


The gadget is placed at a new location on the dialog.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Move Line

The Move Line command moves a line on a report template.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Line and then Move from the pulldownmenus.

The prompt Select line appears.

2. Select a line on the report template.

The line is dynamically attached to the cursor.


3. Move the line to a new location on the report template.



DB Access moves the line to the new position.

5. Return to Step 3 to move the line to another position.

— OR —


— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Move Redlines (Dialog Builder)

The Move Redlines command places a Move Redlines button, which moves the redlineson the drawing by the user.

Dialog Options

When you select Move Redlines, the Move Redlines dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Multiple Column (Dialog Builder)

The Multiple Column command places a field with multiple columns. You can preset thevalues to be displayed in these fields using the Default/Verify option, or you can use scriptsto write runtime data to these fields.

Dialog Options

When you select Multiple Column Field, the Multiple Column dialog appears.


The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, Color,Editing, Default/Verify, Location, and some scrolling options. See the section PlaceGadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of the Text Font, Color, and Location options.

Visible rows — This field specifies the number of rows displayed simultaneously in thefield.

Visible columns — This field specifies the number of rows displayed simultaneouslyin the field.

Total columns — This field limits the total number of columns accessible.

Header label — This field specifies an additional MCF. This MCF functions as aheader and horizontally scrolls in parallel with the original MCF.

Column width — These radio buttons determine how individual columns are sized forworksheets. They are disabled if the MCF has no database hook.

Vertical scroll — This check box lets the MCF scroll vertically.

Display vertical scrollbar — This check box displays the vertical scrollbar. Withoutit, the MCF can be scrolled with the arrow keys.

Vertical scroll notify — This check box causes scripts on the MCF to be processedwhen vertically scrolled.

Column scrolling — This check box enables column scrolling so that invisible columnscan be displayed.

Row select buttons — This check box determines whether or not row select buttonsare available on the MCF. Row select buttons notify DB Access of the row numberselected.

Entire row selection — This check box lets you specify how a tap on a particular cellis interpreted. Single cell selection means that a tap activates only that field, andEntire row selection means that a tap on a cell activates all fields in the row.

CR Required — This check box lets you set this mode which forces you to press aCarriage Return before input to the MCF is processed.

Column info — This field allows setting of attributes for individual columns of theMCF.

Data type — These radio buttons lets you specify the type of data to be entered in thefield. Select ASCII, Integer, or Decimal.

Justification — These radio buttons lets you specify the justification of the data to beentered in the field. Select Left,Center, or Right.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Multi-Column Field (Dialog Builder)

The Multi-Column Field command places a multi-column field on the current dialog, formulti-column text entry/selection/display.

Dialog Options

When you select Multi-Column Field, the Multi-Column Field dialog appears.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Multi Gadget (Dialog Builder)

The Multi Gadget command places a button that performs several functions in succession.You can associate up to six commands with the button.

The commands must be one of the Place Gadget commands (from DatabaseUtilities, Graphics Utilities, or General Utilities).


Dialog Options

When you select Multi Gadget, the Multi Gadget dialog appears.

The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/PlaceSymbol, Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder)for a description of these options.

Blank buttons — These buttons let you specify up to six commands to associate withthe Multi Gadget button. Commands are processed in order from top to bottom.

Add — Selecting this button places the dialog in Add mode. You can select a blankbutton on the dialog, and then select a command to place on the selected button fromthe Placement pulldown menu.

Edit — Selecting this button places the dialog in Edit mode. You can select a buttonthat has a command associated with it. The appropriate dialog will display so that youcan edit the parameters for the command.

Delete — Selecting this button places the dialog in Delete mode. You can select abutton that has a command associated with it to delete the command.


Operating Sequence

1. Select Placement from the Toolbar menu. Select General and then Multi gadgetfrom the pulldown menus.

The Multi Gadget dialog appears. The dialog is in Add mode with the topmost blankbutton selected.

2. Select command from the Placement pulldown menu.

The dialog for the selected command appears.

3. Set the parameters on the dialog. Select OK.

The command dialog disappears. The name of the command appears on the selectedbutton.

4. Select the next blank button on the Group Gadget dialog. Return to Step 2 to addanother command.

— OR —

Select the Edit button and a button to which a command is assigned.

The appropriate dialog for the command appears.

a. Edit any available parameters.

b. Select OK.

The command is updated.

— OR —

Select the Delete button and a button to which a command is assigned.

The command is deleted.

5. Edit the available parameters on the Group Gadget dialog or accept the defaultparameters. Select OK to place the button.

If you selected Keyin and specified coordinates, the button is automatically placed onthe dialog.

— OR —

If you selected Data Point, the button is dynamically attached to the screen cursor. Thex,y coordinates appear in the message area so you can position the button.


Tap the left mouse button to specify the upper left corner for the button. Tap themiddle mouse button a second time to specify the lower right corner.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Multiple Reports (Dialog Builder)

The Multiple Reports command places a Multiple Reports button, which calls theProcess Reports dialog. The user can load and process any report templates in the currenttemplate library.

This function is the same as the Report button in Database Edit.

Dialog Options

When you select Multiple Reports, the Multiple Reports dialog appears.



Operating Sequence


DB Access Commands N - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________New Blank (Dialog Builder)

The New Blank (Dialog Builder) command loads a blank dialog for a table you select.Default Dialog location and size can be set through the Design Options.

A blank template lets you start from scratch, using the commands on the pulldown(placement) menus and the toolbox to design a template with the features and functionalityyou need.

Operating Sequence

1. Select New Blank (Dialog Builder) from the Dialog Builder menu bar.

If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Dialog dialog is called,which lets you write the current dialog template before loading a blankdialog.

2. Use the commands on the pulldown (placement) menus and toolbox to build the dialog.Select Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) to save the dialog to the template library.

Do not delete the Cancel button, unless you replace it with another Cancel orExit button. If you process a dialog that has no Cancel or Exit button, there isno way to dismiss the dialog.

N - 2 DB Access Commands

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________New Blank (Report Builder)

The New Blank (Report Builder) command loads a blank report template for a table youselect. Or you can select Unrelated Tables to load a blank template that lets you report ontables that have no relationship.

A blank template lets you start from scratch, using the commands on the menu bar to designa template with the features and functionality you need.

Dialog Options

When you select New Blank (Report Builder), the DBA Load Report dialog appears.

Schema — This field displays the name of the current schema. Key in a schema nameor select a schema using the display list box.

Table — This field displays the name of the current table. Key in a table name orselect a table from the following table list.


Table List — Below the Table field is a field listing the available tables. You canselect a table from this list.

Unrelated Tables — This button lets you create a template that reports on tables thathave no relationship.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Load Blank from the Report Builder menu bar.

If you have modified the current report template, the Save Report dialogis called, which lets you write the current template before loading a blanktemplate.

The Select Table dialog appears.

2. Select the table for which you want to generate a blank report template. Select OK.

— OR —

Select Unrelated Tables to load a blank report template for unrelated tables.

A blank report template is loaded.

3. Use the commands on the menu bar to build the template. Select Save Report to savethe report template.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________New Default (Dialog Builder)

The New Default (Dialog Builder) command reads the structure of the attached databaseand generates a default dialog template for the table you select.

A default dialog contains the same function buttons as the Database Edit dialog. You canmove, delete, copy and edit existing gadgets, as well as place new gadgets to generate acustom dialog.

Dialog Options

When you select New Default (Dialog Builder), the Select Table dialog appears.


Table — This field displays the name of the current table. Key in a table name orselect a table from the table list below.



No Database — This button lets you create a menu that can be processed on any table,or that has no database functionality (such as a main menu).

Operating Sequence

1. Select New Default (Dialog Builder) from the Dialog Builder menu bar.

If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Dialog dialog is called,which lets you write the current dialog template before loading a defaultdialog. See the section Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) for information onusing this dialog.


2. Select or key in the table for which you want to generate a default dialog. Select Exitand Save.

— OR —

Select No Database.

The specified dialog appears.

3. Use the commands on the menu bar and menu panel to change the dialog. Select SaveDialog (Dialog Builder) to save the dialog to the template library.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________New Default (Report Builder)

The New Default (Report Builder) command reads the structure of the attached databaseand generates a default report template for the table you select.

A default report template contains page headers, lines displaying columns for the input data,subtotals and totals for numeric fields, and a sort key.

Default reports can provide a quick listing of the database table contents or can provide astarting point for creating customized reports.

Default templates do not support unrelated table reports. See the section BlankReports for information on unrelated table reports.

Dialog Options

When you select New Default (Report Builder), the DBA Load Report dialog appears.



Table — This field displays the name of the current table. Key in a table name orselect a table from the following table list.


Select Columns — This button calls the DBA Select Columns dialog, which isdescribed in the following section.

Select Columns Menu Options

Table — This field displays the name of the current table. To change the table, key ina table name or select a table using the display list box.

Column List — Below the Table field is a field listing the columns in the currenttable. You can select columns from this list to be included or excluded from the reporttemplate, depending on the Select All Columns/Select No Columns toggle.

Select All Columns/Select No Columns — This toggle lets you exclude or includeselected columns from the report template. Set the toggle to Select All Columns toselect columns to be excluded. Set the toggle to Select No Columns to select columnsto be included. Columns are ordered across the page in the order you select them.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Load Default from the Report Builder menu bar.

If you have modified the current report template, the Save Report dialogis called, which lets you write the current report template before loading adefault report template. See the section Save Report for information onusing this dialog.


2. Select or key in the table for which you want to generate a default report template.Select OK.


— OR —

Select Select Columns to choose which columns are displayed on the template.


The Select Columns dialog appears.

Set the Select All Columns/Select No Columns toggle and select the columns to beexcluded/included. Select OK.


3. Process the template as it appears.

— OR —

Use the commands on the menu bar to change the report template.

There are three ways to display columns that do not fit on the default template:

a. Delete unwanted fields, which moves fields over from the right margin. See thesection Delete Field.

b. Increase the Columns Per Page of the template. See the section Edit ReportParameters.

c. Use the Place Line and Place Field functions to add lines with additional fields.See the sections Place Line and Place Field.

4. Select Save Report to save the template to the template library.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Next Row (Dialog Builder)

The Next Row command places a Next Row button, which makes the next row in theuniverse the current row. Column values for the current row appear in their correspondingcolumn fields on the dialog.

Dialog Options

When you select Next Row, the Next Row dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Numeric

The Numeric command lets you place a field that performs a specified calculation for thenumeric values in a column. A numeric field can calculate integer or floating point columnvalues.

You can specify update and reset conditions, as well as calculate subtotals. Numeric fieldsused for subtotals and totals are usually placed on body lines and final lines respectively.Numeric fields are not allowed on All Table lines.

Join columns let you use a single table report to report on more than one table. Any twodatabase tables that have columns with common values can be joined. See the section JoinColumns.


Dialog Options

When you select Numeric, the Numeric Field dialog appears.


Calculation — This checklist lets you select the type of calculation that will beperformed.

— Total —Sums the column’s values.

— Average — Averages the column’s values.

— Minimum — Prints the minimum value for the column.

— Maximum — Prints the maximum value for the column.

— Percentage — Prints the percentage of the total of the column.

Schema — This field specifies the schema containing the table for which you want toplace a numeric field. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator toselect a new schema.

Table — This field specifies the table for which you want to place a numeric field. Youcan key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table.

Column — This field specifies the column from the current table for which you want toplace a numeric field. You can key in a new column name or use the list indicator toselect a new column.


Join Columns — This button lets you review and edit the join column relationship.The button is inactive until join columns are specified.

If you place a numeric field from a table other than the current table on a single tablereport, you must specify a join column between the primary (that is, the current) tableand the secondary table. See the section Join Columns.

Length — This field specifies the length of the numeric field.

Decimal Places — This field specifies the number of decimal places for floating pointdata.

Update Condition — This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for thefield to be incremented. If the Update Condition field is blank, the numeric field isincremented for every row.

Reset Condition — This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for thefield to be reset to zero. If the Reset Condition field is blank, the numeric field is notreset.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Numeric from the Report Builder menu bar.

The Numeric Field dialog appears.


— OR —

At the Schema or Table field, enter a new schema or table using key-in or the listindicator.

The Join Columns dialog appears.


— Then —

Specify whether the join is an outer join. Select OK to return to the Numeric Fielddialog.


The Join Columns dialog disappears. The Join Columns button on the NumericField dialog is active.

4. At the Column field on the Numeric Field dialog, use key-in or the list indicator toenter the name of the column from the secondary table for which you want to place afield.



6. Click the middle mouse button to place the field.

The field is inserted before the current field (if any), with one space separating the twofields. Any fields to the right of the new field may shift to the right.


Copy FieldDelete FieldUndelete Field (Report Builder)


— OR —


Once you establish a join column between two tables, you can place additionalnumeric fields from the secondary table. The Join Columns dialog does notreappear.

DB Access Commands O - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Override Key-in (Dialog Builder)

The Override Key-in Mode command calls a panel menu that lets you place buttons to letthe user override key-in modes for column fields. For example, if a user selects an AddQuery button, any value the user enters in a column field is added as query criteria,regardless of the default key-in mode for the field.

Add Query — This button places an Add Query button, which lets a user establishquery criteria, column values used to search the database for rows with commoninformation. See the section Add Query (Dialog Builder).

Key Column — This button places a Key Column button, which lets a user perform aquick search on the database. If a user keys in a value for a column field, DB Accesssearches the database and retrieves the first row that has the same value for thecolumn. See the Section Key Column (Dialog Builder).

Change Row — This button places a Change Row button, which lets a user editcolumn values for a displayed row. See the section Change Row (Dialog Builder).

Change All — This button places a Change All button, which lets a user change thevalue of a column for all rows in the current universe. See the section Change All(Dialog Builder).

Update Active — This button places an Update Active button, which lets a userinsert a new row without changing the current row. See the section Update Active(Dialog Builder).

O - 2 DB Access Commands

DB Access Commands P - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Page

The Page command places a field that prints the report page number. You usually placepage fields on a top or bottom line.

Dialog Options

When you select Page, the DBA Page Field dialog appears.


Length — This field lets you specify the length of the page field.

Current page/Total pages — These radio buttons let you specify the page number toprint out in the page field. If you choose Current Page, the current page of yourreport prints in the page field of each page. If you choose Total Pages, the totalnumber of pages in the report prints in the page field of each page.

P - 2 DB Access Commands

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Pan (Dialog Builder)

The Pan command places a Pan button, which moves a raster image in a window towardsthe cursor.

Dialog Options

When you select Pan, the Pan dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Pan (Raster Graphics)

The Pan command moves the window area in the direction of the cursor position (top,bottom, left, or right). When you select Pan and place a point in the window, the windowarea moves toward the cursor by one-third its width or height.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Pick Row (Dialog Builder)

The Pick Row command places a Pick Row field, which displays the current row number.A user can edit the value in a Pick Row field to change the current row.

Dialog Options

When you select Pick Row, the Pick Row dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Place Fence Block (Dialog Builder)

The Place Fence Block command places a Place Fence Block button, which places afence used to manipulate linkages.

Dialog Options

When you select Place Fence Block, the Place Fence Block dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Place Fence Shape (Dialog Builder)

The Place Fence Shape command places a Place Fence Shape button, which places amulti-sided fence used to manipulate linkages.

Dialog Options

When you select Place Fence Shape, the Place Fence Shape dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Place Field (Report Builder)

The Place Field command calls a submenu of commands that place fields on a reporttemplate.

A field must be placed on a line. If you load a blank template, you must place aline before placing any fields.

Text — This button places a field that prints a literal text string you assign. Textfields are used to print text that remains the same in a report: titles, column headers,and so forth. See the section Text (Report Builder).

Column — This button places a field that prints column values from rows in thecurrent universe. You can place column fields from more than one table on a template.See the section Column.

Date — This button places a field that prints the current date. See the section Date.

Time — This button places a field that prints the current time. See the section Time.

Page — This button places a field that prints the current page number for the report.See the section Page.

Counter — This button places a field that keeps track of how many rows from theinput universe have processed. See the section Counter.

Numeric — This button places a field that calculates a running total for a numericcolumn value. See the section Numeric.

Derived — This button places a field that prints the results of calculations or thecontents of a variable that has been assigned in a script or user action statement. Seethe section Derived.


Print Condition Option

All Place Field dialogs have a Print Condition field, which lets you specify a conditionwhich must exist for the field to print. If the Print Condition field is blank, the associatedreport template field always prints.

Standard Operating Sequence

The following sequence is common to most of the Place Field commands. Any exceptionsare discussed in the individual command descriptions.

1. Select Place Field from the Report Builder menu bar.

The Place Field dialog appears.

2. Select the button for the type of field you want to place.

The dialog for the specified field appears.

3. Edit the available parameters or accept the default parameters. Select OK.


4. Click the middle mouse button to place the field.

The field is inserted before the current field (if any), with one space separating the twofields. Any fields to the right of the new field may shift to the right.


Copy FieldDelete FieldUndelete Field (Report Builder)


— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Place Gadget (Dialog Builder)

The Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) commands let you place DB Access gadgets ontocustom dialogs. Dialog gadgets provide the runtime user with access to and control ofapplication databases. They can also access MicroStation and CLIX commands.

When you select Place Gadget (Dialog Builder), a panel menu appears displayingcommand group buttons for the four general categories of gadgets: Database Utilities,Graphic Utilities, General Utilities, and Cosmetic Graphics. Gadgets in the first threecommand groups perform particular operations, while Cosmetic Graphics effect only theappearance of a dialog.

Database Utilities — This button calls a panel menu that lets you place gadgets toquery and edit the database, and to perform other database manipulations. See thesection Database Utilities (Dialog Builder).

General Utilities — This button calls a panel menu that lets you place gadgets thatperform general functions such as executing a CLIX command or exiting a dialog. Seethe section General Utilities (Dialog Builder).


Common

Before Script — This script is invoked before the Built-In function (if any).

Built-In — The function DBA automatically invokes when the gadget receives input.Option for the built-in function can be specified (when available) by selecting theoptions button.

After Script — This script is invoked after the Built-In function (if any).

Help Topic — This field specifies the gadgets help topic, which can be passed todba_help().

Gadget Label — This field is the gadget label, which can be passed to DBA and FIfunctions.

Options — Allows selection of built-in parameters.

Choose Font — Lets the user select font, font style, and font size for the gadget.

Choose Color — Lets the user select color for the gadget. Windows preference colormust be OFF; otherwise, Control Panel - Color determines the color for the gadget.

Invisible — This check box determines whether the gadget is initially displayed.

Disabled — This check box determines whether the gadget is initially active(selectable).

Windows preference color — This check box determines whether the gadget is coloris specified by Control Panel - Color, or the I/Forms color is used.

Initial notify — This check box determines whether the dialog’s initial notify routineis called when the cursor is positioned in a field gadget.

Completion notify — This check box determines whether the dialog’s completionnotify routine is called when input is made to the gadget.


Single Column

1. Database Hook — This check box determines whether database values can bedisplayed from the gadget.

2. Schema — This field specifies the schema containing the table for which you want toconnect a database hook. You can key in the schema name or use the list indicator toselect a schema.

3. Table — This field specifies the table for which you want to connect a database hook.You can key in the table name or use the list indicator to select a table.

4. Column — This field specifies the column from the current table for which you want toplace a database hook. You can key in the column name or use the list indicator toselect a column.

5. Default Mode — These radio buttons are used to select the CR mode for the gadget.

6. Write Access — This check box permits write access to the column that you arehooking the gadget to.

Multiple Column database dialog, available from worksheet.


Choose Font






Choose Color

Off Color/On Color — This toggle lets you select colors for shadowed text. Off Coloris the color used for the shadow. On Color is the color used for the text.

For normal text, the Off Color is used for the text.

Button Palette — These buttons display the default colors available. Select a buttonto select the color.

Specify color — This field lets you key in any color slot supported by yourworkstation.

Field Options Subdialog

Scrolling Options Dialog

When you select Scrolling on the User Field dialog, the Scrolling Options dialogappears.


Scrolling Mode — This checklist lets you specify the scrolling mode available to theuser.

— Vertical scrolling — This checklist box creates a field with vertical scrolling. Youcan optionally display a vertical scroll bar. When Vertical scrolling is selected, theDisplay vertical scrollbar - NO/Display vertical scrollbar - YES and Verticalscrollbar notify - NO/Vertical scrollbar notify - YES toggles are active.

— Horizontal scrolling — This checklist box creates a field with horizontal scrolling.You can optionally display a horizontal scroll bar. When Horizontal scrolling isselected, the Display horizontal scrollbar - NO/Display horizontal scrollbar -YES toggle is active.

Display horizontal scrollbar - NO/Display horizontal scrollbar - YES — Thistoggle specifies whether a horizontal scroll bar appears on the field. This toggle isactive whenever horizontal scrolling is selected.

Display vertical scrollbar - NO/Display vertical scrollbar - YES — This togglespecifies whether a vertical scroll bar appears on the field. This toggle is activewhenever vertical scrolling is selected.

Vertical scrollbar notify - NO/Vertical scrollbar notify - YES — This check boxlets you specify whether DBA is notified when the user selects the vertical scroll bar.

Wrap text - NO/Wrap text - YES — This toggle specifies whether input is limited tothe length of the field. If you select Wrap text - NO, input terminates at the end of thefield. If you select Wrap text - YES, input wraps to the next row when it reaches theend of the field.

Horizontal scrolling does not permit text wrapping.


Default/Verify Options Dialog

When you select Defaults/Verify on the User Field dialog, the Default/Verify Optionsdialog appears.

Verify against list - NO/Verify against list - YES — This toggle specifies whether avalue entered in the gadget must match a value in the drop down list. If you selectVerify against list - YES, input that does not match a value in the list is rejected.This check box is inactive if the field has no list.

Minimum value — This field specifies the minimum numeric value that can beentered in the gadget. This field is active for integer or floating point data only.

Maximum value — This field specifies the maximum numeric value that can beentered in the gadget. This field is active for integer or floating point data only.

Format string — This field specifies the format for numeric data input. This field isactive for integer or floating point data only. Standard C format strings must be used(%d, %f, etc.).

Default field values — This field lets you key in default initial values for the gadget.

Standard Operating Sequence

The following sequence is common to most of the Place Gadget commands. Any exceptionsare discussed in the individual command descriptions.

1. Select Placement from the Toolbar menu.

2. Select the command group (Database Utilities, Graphic Utilities, or GeneralUtilities, for the gadget you want to place.


If the gadget is not part of a command sub-group, go to Step 4.

3. Select the command sub-group for the gadget you want to place.

The specified panel menu appears.

4. Select the button for the gadget you want to place.

The dialog for the specified gadget appears.

5. Edit the available parameters or accept the default parameters. Select OK to place thegadget.

If you selected Keyin and specified coordinates, the gadget is automatically placed onthe dialog.

— OR —

If you selected Data Point, the gadget is dynamically attached to the screen cursor. Thex,y coordinates appear in the message area so you can position the gadget.

Click the left mouse button to specify the upper left corner for the gadget. If required,tap the left mouse button a second time to specify the lower right corner.

— OR —

Select Cancel to abort the placement.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Place Line

The Place Line command calls the Edit Line menu, which lets you place blank report lines.You must place lines on a report template before placing fields.

Dialog Options

When you select Place Line, the DBA Edit Line dialog appears.

Single table/All tables — These radio buttons specify whether the line is processedagainst a specific (single) table or against all tables in the attached database. SelectAll tables for common lines (such as page headings) in an unrelated tables report.Select Single table for all other report lines.

You cannot place column or numeric fields on All table lines.


Schema — This field specifies the schema which contains the table associated with theline. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a newschema.

This field is labeled Structure for userdata and ASCII reports.

Table — This field specifies the table associated with the line. You can key in a newtable name or use the list indicator to select a new table.


Line Type — This checklist specifies the current line type.

— Preface — These lines print once at the beginning of a report. After all prefacelines are printed, the report continues on a new page. You can use preface lines toprint a cover sheet, title page, or legend.

— Top — These lines print once at the top of every page. Page headings, columnheadings, date, time, and page number are included in the top lines of defaultreports created with the Load Default command.

— Body — These lines print once for every row in the input universe. They usuallycontain column fields.

— Bottom — These lines print once at the bottom of every page. Page numbers orfootnotes can be printed with bottom lines.

— Final — These lines print once at the end of the report. You can use final lines toprint report summaries or report totals.

Blank Lines Before — This field specifies the number of blank lines that print beforethe line.

Blank Lines After — This field specifies the number of blank lines that print after theline.

Print Condition — This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for the lineto print. If Print Condition is blank, the line is always printed.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Placement from the Toolbar menu and then select Line from the pulldownmenu.

The Edit Line dialog appears.

2. Edit the available parameters or accept the default parameters. Select OK.


The line is dynamically attached to the cursor. The values in the message area can helpyou position the blank line on the template.


The line is inserted before the current line (if any).

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Plot Window (Dialog Builder)

The Plot Window command places a Plot Window button, which plots the specified rasterimage.

Dialog Options

When you select Plot Window, the Plot Window dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Plot Window (Raster Graphics)

The Plot Window command creates a Type 2 (straight byte) file for the specified windowand plots it using the command string specified in the DBA_PLOT environment variable.


You must define and export DBA_PLOT. The image to be plotted must be displayed. Formore information, see these sections Load File (Raster Graphics) and DM/DB AccessEnvironment Variables.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Previous Row (Dialog Builder)

The Previous Row command places a Previous Row button, which makes the previousrow in the universe the current row. Column values for the current row appear in theircorresponding column fields on the dialog.

Dialog Options

When you select Previous Row, the Previous Row dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Process Dialog

The Process Dialog command processes dialogs created in the DB Access Dialog Builder.This processing lets you test gadgets on the current dialog to see if they are workingproperly.

You can also process the current dialog from the Execute palette of the DB Access mainmenu bar or from the Dialog Builder toolbar.

From Dialog Builder

Selecting the Process Dialog button processes the current dialog.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Process Query (Database Edit)

The Process Query command returns all rows in the current table that meet the querycriteria. The set of rows that meets the query criteria is called a universe of rows. If noquery criteria exist, the universe contains all rows for the current table.

If you place a fence in a design file, Process Query returns all rows with database linkagesto the elements within the fence.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Process Query (Dialog Builder)

The Process Query command places a Process Query button, which queries all rows ofthe current table that meet the current query criteria. If no query criteria exists, it queriesall rows in the current table.

Dialog Options

When you select Process Query, the Process Query dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Process Report

The Process Report command processes templates created in the Report Builder. Youcan send report output to a file or review it on the screen.

To generate the input universe of rows for the report, you can use an SQL select statement ora saved query criteria. Or the universe can be all rows with database linkages to elementswithin a fenced area in a design file. You can access the Process Report command from themenu bar, from Database Edit, or from the Report Builder menu bar.

The Process button calls the Process Reports dialog.

Output File — This field specifies the output filename for the report generated whenyou process the report template. If you do not specify a full pathname for the file, it iswritten to your working directory (from which you invoked DB Access).

If the output filename is stdout, no file is created. The report output is sent to the DBAccess standard output device which, by default, is the invoking window.

Element List/Input File — This field specifies an element list or input file to use asinput to a report template.

Load Report — This button calls the Load From Library dialog, which lets you loada report template from a specified template library. For more information, see thesection Load From Library.

Edit Query — This button calls the Edit Query dialog, which lets you load a querycriteria template. The query criteria is used to generate an input universe of rows forthe report. For unrelated table reports, you can load a query criteria template for eachtable. You can also edit the current query criteria. For more information, see thesection Edit Query (Database Edit).

Process — This button processes the input universe of rows against the current reporttemplate to generate the report to the specified output file.

List Output — This button calls a report output dialog, which is described in thefollowing section, Report Output Dialog Options.

Report Tables — The fields just below the Element List/Input File field list thetables that the current report template reports on. If the report is an unrelated tablesreport, more than one table is listed. You can control the input universe for each tableindependently. A single table report template lists only one (primary) table.

Processing Options — This field lets you select the method for generating the inputuniverse for the report.


— All — This option includes all rows for the specified table as input for the report

template.

— Query — This option includes rows that meet the specified query criteria togenerate the input universe for the report template. This option also determines ifthe fence contents in a design file are to be used as the query criteria. Use theMicroStation Place Fence command to place a fence around the elements that youwant to report on. The database rows with linkages to the fenced elements willserve as input to the report.

If you load a query criteria template but do not select Query, the querycriteria is not used.

— Element List/Input File — This option uses an element list/ASCII file as input toa user data/ASCII structure template. You must identify the file in the ElementList/Input File field.

— Exclude — This option excludes the table as input to the report template. Selectthis option only with unrelated table reports when you want to report on some, butnot all, of the tables.

Report Output Dialog Options

When you select List Output, a report output dialog appears.

Report Listing — This field displays the report.


Read More — This button displays the next page of a multipage report.

Read To EOF — This button scrolls to the end of the report.

Text Size — This button calls the Text Size dialog, which lets you change the size ofthe text display on the report output dialog. Use the slider to change the text size.

Print — This button displays the standard print dialog, so that report output can beprinted.

DM/DB Access Environment Variables

From Database Edit

When you select Report, the Process Reports dialog appears. The dialog is described inthe previous section, From the Main Dialog.

From Report Builder

When you select Process Report from the menu bar, the report output dialog for thecurrent report template appears. See the section Report Output Dialog Options for adescription of the dialog.

DB Access Commands Q - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Query (Dialog Builder)

The Query command calls a panel menu containing commands for placing Query functionbuttons on the current dialog.

Process Query — This button places a Process Query button, which queries all rowsof the current table that meet the Query Criteria. If no Query Criteria exists, it queriesall rows in the current table. See the section Process Query (Dialog Builder).

Edit Query — This button places an Edit Query button, which displays the EditQuery screen. From the Edit Query screen you can view, edit, and save the currentquery criteria, or load a query criteria from the attached template library. See thesection Edit Query (Dialog Builder).

Initialize Query — This button places an Initialize Query button, which initializes(clears) the current query criteria. See the section Initialize Query (Dialog Builder).

AND/OR Toggle — This button places an AND/OR toggle, which lets you select alogical AND or OR operation when establishing query criteria with Add Query. Seethe section AND/OR Toggle (Dialog Builder).

Relational Operator — This button places a Relational Operator field, which letsyou search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than whenestablishing query criteria with Add Query. See the section Relational Operator (DialogBuilder).

Set Query — This button places a Set Query button, which lets you initialize thequery criteria, load a saved query template, and process the query criteria in one step.See the section Set Query (Dialog Builder).

Q - 2 DB Access Commands

Add Query — This button places an Add Query button, which lets you establishquery criteria, column values used to search the database for rows with commoninformation. See the section Add Query (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Quit (Dialog Builder)

The Quit command places a Quit button, which dismisses the specified raster graphicswindow.

Dialog Options

When you select Quit, the Quit dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Quit (Raster Graphics)

The Quit command dismisses the selected window. To use this command, select Quit and awindow.

DB Access Commands R - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Radio Button (Dialog Builder)

The Radio Button command places a radio button. You can use scripts to define thefunction or read the value of the radio button.

Dialog Options

When you select Radio Button, the Radio Button dialog appears.


Unselected/Selected — This check box specifies the default value for the gadget.

Radio Group — This field specifies a label number for a group of radio buttons thatyou place. Assigning a group label number lets you treat the checklist as a singlegadget, with only one box selectable at a time. Each box also has an individual labelnumber. If Group Label is non-zero, Radio buttons are placed instead of checklists.

R - 2 DB Access Commands

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Raster View (Dialog Builder)

Raster View gadgets are placed on dialogs so that runtime users can load and manipulatesupported raster files and text files. The Raster View command calls the following panelmenu:

Load File — This button places a Load File button, which displays the specifiedraster file. For more information, see the section Load File (Dialog Builder).

Plot Window — This button places a Plot Window button, which plots the specifieddisplay. For more information, see the section Plot Window (Dialog Builder).

Quit — This button places a Quit button that dismisses the specified graphics window.For more information, see the section Quit (Dialog Builder).

Fit — This button places a Fit button, which displays an entire document in thespecified window. For more information, see the section Fit View (Dialog Builder).

Measure — This button places a Measure button, which determines the distancebetween two points in a raster image. For more information, see the section Measure(Dialog Builder).

Pan — This button places a Pan button, which moves the window area toward thecursor. For more information, see the section Pan (Dialog Builder).

Rotate — This button places a Rotate button, which moves the raster image in thewindow area in a counter-clockwise direction. For more information, see the sectionRotate (Dialog Builder).


Update View — This button places an Update View button, which refreshes thespecified window. For more information, see the section Update View (Dialog Builder).

Window Area — This button places a Window Area button, which displays the areaspecified by two points. For more information, see the section Window Area (DialogBuilder).

Window Center — This button places a Window Center button, which brings theselected point in a raster image to the center of the window. For more information, seethe section Window Center (Dialog Builder).

Window Scroll — This button places a Window Scroll button, which moves thewindow area from one specified point to another. For more information, see the sectionWindow Scroll (Dialog Builder).

Zoom In — This button places a Zoom In button, which displays half as much of thespecified file at twice the resolution. For more information, see the section Zoom In(Dialog Builder).

Zoom Out — This button places a Zoom Out button, which displays twice as much ofthe specified file at half the resolution. For more information, see the section Zoom Out(Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Rectangle (Dialog Builder)

The Rectangle command lets you place a rectangle on the current dialog. You can selectline style, and weight. Rectangles are useful for grouping related gadgets together.

Dialog Options

When you select Rectangle, the Rectangle dialog appears.

The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Location and Coloroptions. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for descriptions of these options.

Select Line Weight — This button calls a dialog that lets you specify a line weight forthe rectangle you are placing. Use the slider on the dialog to select an active lineweight.

Select Line Style — This button calls a dialog that lets you specify a line style for therectangle you are placing. Select the checklist box next to the style you want to use.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Relational Operator (Dialog Builder)

The Relational Operator command places a Relational Operator field, which lets yousearch for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than when establishingquery criteria with Add Query.

You can key in a new value or select the list indicator in the Field Options subdialog toselect from the available relational operators.

At runtime, comments are appended to the relational operator using the List option from theDialog Builder. Place comments after a semicolon in the predefined list values field. For anexample of predefined list values, edit the Relational Operator field on a default dialog.

Dialog Options

When you select Relational Operator, the Relational Operator dialog appears.



Rows — This field lets you specify the number of rows that appear simultaneously inthe associated list field for the Relational Operator field.

Length — This field lets you specify the length for the field.

Field Options — This subdialog lets you call other dialogs to set further parameters.Select from Scrolling, and Defaults/Verify. The respective dialogs are described inthe section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder).

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Remove Fence (Database Edit)

The Remove Fence button removes linkages attached to graphic elements within a fenceyou place.

Delete Row

When you remove a database linkage from a graphic element, the value of the Delete Rowtoggle determines whether the database rows linked to the graphic elements are deleted also.If Delete Row is toggled to On, the rows linked to the element are deleted when thelinkages are removed. Off specifies that only the linkages are removed.



For files with database linkages, set the Delete Row toggle to the appropriate value.

Place a fence around the elements for which you want to remove linkages.

— Vector graphics: Use the MicroStation Place Fence command.

— Raster graphics: Use the Place Fence or Place Fence Multi command. You canplace these commands with the Dialog Builder or you can call the script functionsdba_raster_fence or dba_raster_fence_multi.


1. Select Remove Fence from the Database Edit dialog.

The prompt Accept/reject fence contents appears.

2. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the elements in the fenceyou have specified.

The message Processing fence contents appears, followed by Linkages removed. IfDelete Row is set to On, a warning screen appears, asking you to verify the deletion ofrows along with the linkages.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the fence and exit the command.


3. Select Yes to delete all linkages and corresponding database rows for the graphic

elements in the fence.

The message Linkage(s) removed appears. DB Access exits the command.

— OR —

Select No to cancel the remove linkages processing.

DB Access exits the command.


1. Select Remove Fence from the Database Edit dialog.

The linkages within the fence highlight and the prompt Accept/reject fence appears.

2. Click the left mouse button in the window to remove the linkages.

DB Access removes the displayed linkages and exits the command.

— OR —

If no linkages exist within the fence, the message No linkages found appears. DB Accessexits the command.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the fence and exit the command.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Remove Fence (Dialog Builder)

The Remove Fence command places a Remove Fence button, which removes the linkageson any graphic elements contained within a fence defined by the user. For more information,see the section Remove Fence (Database Edit)

Dialog Options

When you select Remove Fence, the Remove Fence dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Remove Linkage (Database Edit)

The Remove Linkage button lets you remove linkages attached to a graphic element.

Delete Row

When you remove a database linkage from a graphic element, the value of the Delete Rowtoggle determines whether the database rows linked to the graphic elements are deleted also.If Delete Row is toggled to On, the rows linked to the element are deleted when thelinkages are removed. Off specifies that only the linkages are removed.



For files with database linkages, set the Delete Row toggle to the appropriate value.


1. Select Remove Linkage from the Database Edit dialog.


2. Position the cursor on the graphic element for which you want to remove the databaselinkage(s). Tap the left mouse button.


— OR —


3. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the element.

The type of linkage (Read or Read/Write), the table name, and the entity (table) numberand mslink value for the first linkage on the element appear in the following format:

R/W <tablename> (E#, mslink = n)

where # equals the table number (the value for the table in the entitynum column of themscatalog table) and n equals the mslink value for the database row. The messageAccept/reject linkage appears.

— OR —


If there are no linkages attached to the selected element, the message No linkage presentappears.

Return to Step 2.

— OR —


4. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the displayed linkage.

The message Linkage removed appears. If Delete Row is set to On, the correspondingrow in the database is deleted. The prompt Identify element/reset to exit reappears.

— OR —

Click the right mouse button to reject the displayed linkage.

Information for the next linkage on the element appears.

Repeat Step 3.

— OR —

If no more linkages are attached, the message No linkage present appears. The promptIdentify element/reset to exit reappears.

5. Return to Step 2 to remove more database linkages for graphic elements.

— OR —



1. Select Remove Linkage from the Database Edit dialog.

2. Position the cursor on the graphic element for which you want to remove the linkages.Click the left mouse button.

The element highlights, and the following prompt appears:

Accept/Reject,<type> linkage (for note or file linkage)

Accept/Reject, Entity Number = #, Mslink = n (fordatabase linkage)

where # equals the table number (the value for the table in the entitynum column of themscatalog table) and n equals the mslink value for the database row.

— OR —


If there are no linkages attached to the selected element, the message No linkage presentappears. DB Access exits the command.

— OR —


3. Click the middle mouse button in the window to accept (remove) the displayed linkage.

— OR —


The element highlights, indicating another linkage. You are prompted to accept/rejectthe linkage.

Repeat Step 3.

— OR —

If no more linkages are attached, the message No more linkages appears.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Remove Linkage (Dialog Builder)

The Remove Linkage command places a Remove Linkage button, which removes thelinkages on any graphic elements selected by the user. For more information, see the sectionRemove Linkage (Database Edit).

Dialog Options

When you select Remove Linkage, the Remove Linkage dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Report (Database Edit)

The Report command calls the Process Reports dialog, which lets you load and process areport template. For more information, see the section Process Report.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Report (Dialog Builder)

The Report command calls a menu panel containing commands for placing Report functionbuttons on a dialog.

Multiple Reports — This button places a Multiple Reports button, which calls theProcess Reports dialog. The user can load and process any report templates in thecurrent template library. See the section Multiple Reports (Dialog Builder).

Review – This button places a Review button, which generates a quick review of thecurrent universe of rows to an output screen. See the section Review (Dialog Builder).

Single Report — This button places a Report button, which is linked to a reporttemplate in the current template library (and optionally to a query criteria template).When you selects Report, the report template is processed against the current universeof rows (or the universe generated by the specified query criteria). The report output iswritten to the screen. See the section Single Report (Dialog Builder).


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Restore Defaults (Database Edit)

The Restore Defaults command restore the database edit screen to its original state.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Restore Defaults (Dialog Builder)

The Restore Defaults command places a Restore Defaults button, which restores thedefault values of the columns displayed by any column field.

Dialog Options

When you select Restore Defaults, the Restore Defaults dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Review (Database Edit)

The Review command generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the currentuniverse (defined by the current query criteria). The review lists each column that is toggledon (see the section Fields On/Off (Database Edit)). The review also totals numeric columns.

Dialog Options

When you select Review, a Universe Review dialog appears.

Universe Listing — This worksheet displays multiple columns and rows from thecurrent universe. Worksheet headers list the names of on columns.

Filename — This field specifies the name of a file to which the universe review can bewritten.

Line Length — This field specifies the number of characters in a line in the outputfile.

Page Length — This field specifies the number of lines in a page in the output file.

Write File — This button writes the universe review to the file specified.


Print File — This button prints the universe review. This button invokes the Printdialog, which sends the review to a print device.

Read More — This button displays the next page of a multipage review.

Read To EOF — This button scrolls to the end of the universe review.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Review (Dialog Builder)

The Review command places a Review button, which sends a formatted column-by-columnlisting of the current universe of rows to the screen. Only those columns toggled ON areincluded in the review.

Dialog Options

When you select Review, the Review dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Review Element (Database Edit)

The Review Element command reviews linkages for a graphic element in a design or rasterfile. When you select Review Element and identify a graphic element for which a linkageexists, DB Access responds differently according to the linkage type.

Linkage Response

Database The associated row becomes the current universe.

Notes The Attach/Review Notes dialog appears, displaying theassociated text file. Raster graphics only.

File Displays the associated raster element. Raster graphics only.If the file linkage is to an element in the same file, and onlyone window currently displays the file, DB Access highlightsand zooms in on the associated element in that window. Iftwo or more windows display the file, the highlighted elementis displayed in another window.

If the linkage is to an element in another file, and that file iscurrently displayed, DB Access highlights and zooms in on theassociated element in that window. If the file is not currentlydisplayed, DB Access loads the file and displays thehighlighted element.

The display of file linkages can be controlled with the globalvariables dba_fl_mode, dba_fl_zoom, and dba_fl_blink. Formore information, see the section DB Access Global Variables.


You must have a design or raster file loaded. The graphic elements in the file must havelinkages.


1. Select Review Element from the Database Edit dialog.

2. At the prompt, Identify element/reset to exit, place the cursor on the graphic element forwhich you want to review the database linkages. Click the left mouse button.


— OR —



3. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the highlighted graphic

element.

The type of linkage (Read or Read/Write), the table name, and the entity (table) numberand mslink value for the first linkage on the element appear in the following format:

R/W <tablename> (E#, mslink = n)

where # equals the table number (the value for the table in the entitynum column of themscatalog table) and n equals the mslink value for the database row. The messageAccept/reject linkage appears.

— OR —


Return to Step 2.

— OR —


4. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the displayed linkage.

The row with the mslink value equal to the displayed value for the linkage appears in theDatabase Edit dialog. The universe now consists of the accepted row.

The prompt Identify element/reset to exit reappears.

— OR —


Information for the next linkage on the element appears.

Repeat Step 4.

— OR —

If no more linkages are present, the message No linkage present appears.

5. Return to Step 2 to review more database linkages for graphic elements.

— OR —




1. Select Review Element from the Database Edit dialog.

2. Place the cursor on the graphic element for which you want to review the linkages. Tapthe left mouse button.

The element highlights, and the following prompt appears:

Accept/Reject, <type> linkage (for note or file linkage)

Accept/Reject, Entity Number = #, Mslink = n (for database linkage)

where # equals the table number (the value for the table in the entitynum column of themscatalog table) and n equals the mslink value for the database row.

— OR —


3. Tap the left mouse button in the window to accept the displayed linkage.

DB Access responds according to the linkage type. See the preceding table.

— OR —


The element highlights, indicating another linkage. You are prompted to accept/rejectthe linkage.

Repeat Step 3.

— OR —

If no more linkages are present, the message No more linkages appears.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Review Element (Dialog Builder)

The Review Element command places a Review Element button, which reviews linkagesfor a graphic element in a design or raster file. For more information, see the section ReviewElement (Database Edit).

Dialog Options

When you select Review Element, the Review Element dialog appears.



Verify Element/Don’t Verify Element — This toggle determines whether ReviewElement searches for more than one element in a specified area. When the toggle isset to Verify Element, DB Access finds multiple linkages if they exist.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Review Sequence (Dialog Builder)

The Review Sequence command displays existing sequences on the current dialog asdotted yellow arrows between the sequenced gadgets.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________RIS Schema Manager

The RIS Schema Manager dialog displays a three-column table listing all the schemasknown to RIS, each schema type, and the schema’s associated dictionary. Buttonscorresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager are also on the form. When you select abutton, you initiate that particular action, and the associated subform is displayed. Whenyou select one of the schemas from the list on the RIS Schema Manager dialog, informationabout that schema is displayed on the subform.

Operating Sequence

1. Activate the RIS Schema Manager by keying in:

c:\win32app\ingr\share\ris05.00\bin\rismgr

The RIS Schema Manager dialog is displayed.


2. Select the button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog for the function you want to

use. The RIS Schema Manager functions are described briefly in the following list. Seethe section listed for a complete description.

Button Name Function

Schema Definition Provides additional functions and dialog for schemadefinition. See the section Schema Definition.

Data Definition Provides additional functions and dialogs that manipulatetables, views, and indexes. See the section Data Definition.

Schema File Lets you review and manipulate schema files. See the sectionSchema File.

Locate Client Lets you review and specify the location of a RIS clientprocess. See the section Locate Client.

Set Lets you set mode ANSI on or off and enable differentdatabases. See the section Set.

3. Select the Restore button to erase the secondary dialogs.

The RIS Schema Manager rereads the RIS schemas file.

— OR —

Select the Close button to terminate the RIS Schema Manager.


Schema Definition

The Schema Definition dialog lets you initiate functions to display schema information,create and drop schemas, access secure schemas and dictionaries, and modify schemapasswords, node information, and DB2 passwords.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Schema Definition button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog.

The Schema Definition dialog appears. The dialog has eight buttons that let youinitiate a particular action.

2. Select the button from the Schema Definition dialog for the function you want to use.The Schema Definition functions are described briefly in the following list. See thesection for a complete description.

Button Name Function

Schema Information Displays information about a specified schema. See thesection Schema Information.

Create Schema Lets you create schemas. See the section Create Schema.

Drop Schema Lets you drop schemas. See the section Drop Schema.

Secure Schema Access Grants and revokes access to a secure schema. See thesection Secure Schema Access.

Dictionary Access Grants and revokes dictionary access to a schema. See thesection Dictionary Access.

Modify Schema Password Lets you modify the schema password. See the section ModifySchema Password Form.

Modify Node Information Lets you modify node information. See the section ModifyNode Information.


Modify DB2 Password Lets you modify the DB2 password. See the section Modify

DB2 Password.

3. Select the Restore button to erase the secondary dialogs.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the Schema Definition dialog.


Schema Information

The Schema Information dialog displays information about a specified schema. You cankey in a schema name or select a name from the schema list on the RIS Schema Managerdialog.

This dialog only displays information; it is not editable.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Schema Information button from the Schema Definition dialog.

The Schema Information dialog appears and displays information about the activeschema (if one has been selected from the RIS Schema Manager dialog).

2. Key in the schema name in the Schema Name field on the Schema Informationdialog or select a schema from the schema list on the RIS Schema Manager dialog ifthe schema you want is not already the active schema.

The information is displayed.

3. Select the Restore button to clear the dialog.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the Schema Information dialog.


Create Schema

The Create Schema dialog creates new RIS schemas and corresponds directly to the RIScreate schema statement. The database-specific information on the Create Schema dialogcan be entered in three ways:

1. By keying in the information directly. If the schema is being created on a databaseunknown to RIS, this is the only alternative.

2. By selecting an existing schema from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. Thedatabase-specific information about that schema is entered into the Create Schemaform. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas on adatabase.

3. By selecting the Display Databases button. A dialog listing all the known RISdatabases is displayed. Selecting one of these databases enters information about thatdatabase into the Create Schema dialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Create Schema button from the Schema Definition dialog.

The Create Schema dialog is displayed.

The Create Schema dialog has two areas:

— The DBMS-independent area.

— The DBMS-dependent area.

2. Key in the appropriate values for the DBMS-independent section of the dialog. Thefollowing list explains the DBMS-independent fields:


a. Schema Name — Specifies the schema name. Select the field and key in a

schema name.

b. Password — Optionally, select the Password field to specify a password for theschema. The No Echo/Echo toggle causes the password to not display (No Echo)or display (Echo) when it is keyed in.

c. Schema Type — Toggles between Standard and Secure schemas.

d. Network Protocol — Specifies the type of network protocol to use tocommunicate with the remote site. Only the top (#1) protocol is used in the CreateSchema statement. When you select a protocol, it moves to the bottom (#4). (ISOis not currently supported.)

To change the order of the Network Protocol fields, select one NetworkProtocol field and its value is replaced with the value of the Network Protocolfield below it. The value that was originally selected is moved to the bottom of thelist.

e. Nodename or Address — Specifies a nodename, an Ethernet address (specifiedin the form [lan.]address), an Internet address, or an address appropriate for theprotocol.

f. Get Client Address — Fills the Nodename or Address fields with theaddresses of the client machines.

g. Database Username — Specifies the database username.

h. Password — Lets you specify a password for the database username. The NoEcho/Echo toggle causes the password to not display (No Echo) or display (Echo)when it is keyed in.

i. Include Database User’s Tables/Views — Toggles between Yes to include thedatabase user’s tables and views, or No.

j. OS Type — Specifies the operating system type on which the server is running.For example, UNIX, VMS, or Windows NT.

k. Use Existing Dictionary — Toggles between No (the default) and Yes. Youmust already have permission from the dictionary owner to use an existingdictionary.

l. Dictionary Owner — Specifies a user who owns a dictionary in the particulardatabase.

3. Database Type — Displays a list of the database types. If the selected database typerequires additional information, fields to key in that information will be displayed whenyou select the database type.

4. Select the list indicator on the right side of the Database Type field.


A list of the DBMSs supported by RIS is displayed.

The supported RDBMSs are:

— INFORMIX

— ORACLE

— INGRES

— DB2

— RDB

— SYBASE

— OS400

5. Select a database type from the list.

Various fields specific to the DBMS are displayed.

The DBMS-dependent fields for each database type are explained inseparate subsections following this section.

6. To display databases known to RIS, select the Display Databases button.


The RIS Databases dialog is displayed. Databases known to RIS are listed on thisdialog.

If you select a database from the RIS Databases dialog, information about thatdatabase is placed in the Create Schema dialog.

Fields specific to each type of database are displayed on the Create Schema form.

7. Go to the section specific to the type of database you are creating for instructions onfilling in the DBMS-dependent fields.


Create Schema (DB2)Create Schema (INFORMIX)Create Schema (INGRES)Create Schema (ORACLE)Create Schema (RDB)Create Schema (SYBASE)Create Schema (OS400)

Create Schema (INFORMIX)

When you select the INFORMIX DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the INFORMIX-dependent fields appear on the dialog.


Operating Sequence

1. Key in the appropriate values for the INFORMIX-dependent dialog. The following listexplains these fields:

— Database Name — Specifies the INFORMIX database name accessible to theschema.

— Database Management System Location — Specifies the path where theINFORMIX RDBMS is installed.

— SQLEXEC — Specifies whether the INFORMIX OnLine or INFORMIX StandardEngine is being used. Needs to be set if both the Standard Engine and Online existon the machine. Otherwise INFORMIX defaults to on-line. Where $INFORMIXDIRis the location of the INFORMIX Database Management System, if usingINFORMIX OnLine, specify $INFORMIXDIR/lib/sqlturbo; if using the INFORMIXStandard Engine, specify $INFORMIXDIR/lib/sqlexec.

— DBTEMP — Specifies where INFORMIX will create temporary files.

— TBCONFIG — Specifies the location of the TBCONFIG file used by INFORMIXOnLine. (This file permits INFORMIX OnLine to be configured so that a largenumber of tables can be used with joins. Also, table structures and limits can bevaried with this file. Refer to your INFORMIX documentation for more informationon the TBCONFIG file.)

2. When complete, select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the schema.

— OR —

Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog.

— OR —


Select the Force button to drop previously created RIS dictionary objects (such as RIStables, views, indexes, and schema privileges) before creating the new schema.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the dialog without creating a schema.

Create Schema (ORACLE)

When you select the ORACLE DBMS on the Create Schema dialog, the ORACLE-dependent fields appear on the dialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Key in the appropriate values for the ORACLE-dependent fields. The following listexplains these fields:

— Database Name — Specifies the system ID (SID) of the ORACLE database.

— Database Management System Location — Specifies the ORACLE home path(where ORACLE is installed).

— OS Username — Specifies a valid OS log-in name on the server machine.

— Password — Specifies the OS log-in password, if any.

For a given ORACLE SID, all schemas created using that SID musthave the same OS Username and Password combination.


— OR —



— OR —


— OR —


Create Schema (INGRES)

When you select the INGRES DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the INGRES-dependent fields appear on the dialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Key in the appropriate values for the INGRES-dependent fields. The following listexplains these fields:

— Database Name — Specifies the INGRES database name accessible to the schema.

— Database Management System Location — Needed for all UNIX server nodes.It is optional for VAX installations. This option provides RIS with the location of theINGRES software on the remote system. It should be the same as the UNIXenvironment variable II_SYSTEM on the remote system.


— OR —


— OR —



— OR —


Create Schema (DB2)

When you select the DB2 DBMS on the Create Schema dialog, the DB2-dependent fieldsappear on the dialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Key in the appropriate values for the DB2-dependent fields. The following list explainsthese fields:

— Database Name — Specifies a DB2 database name accessible by the schema. It iscase sensitive.

— Group Name — Specifies the RACF group name for TCPIP protocol. The RACFgroup name is passed to the RIS Transaction Processor security exit on the IBMmainframe system for use during sign-on processing. (Optional.)



For LU6.2 protocol, the Group Name field is ignored in this version ofRIS.

— IBM Network Protocol — Specifies the network protocol that RIS uses to get tothe IBM machine on which the DBMS resides. The IBM network protocols LU6.2and TCP are displayed.


2. Select a protocol.

The following fields are valid for LU6.2 network protocol only:

— RIS LU Name — Specifies SSI local LU name, either fully qualified or local. It iscase sensitive.

— Host LU Name — Specifies SSI remote LU name, either fully qualified or local. Itis case sensitive.

— LU62 Mode Name — Name of the Intergraph System Administrator assigned tothe node that permits communication to the RIS program on an IBM machine. Themode assigns attributes to the connection and must be predefined by the IntergraphSystem Administrator. The Mode Name is defined when LU6.2 is configured. Thisvalue is case sensitive.

— Host Program Name — Specifies the name the IBM System Administrator calledthe RIS server when it was installed on the IBM, the CES transaction name. Thisname is case sensitive.


The following fields are valid for TCP network protocol only:

— IBM Nodename or Address — Specifies the TCPIP hostname or IP address of theIBM mainframe system.

— IBM Port — Specifies the TCPIP port number assigned to the RIS TransactionProcessor server on the IBM Mainframe system. (Required.)


— OR —


— OR —


— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the form without creating a schema.

Create Schema (RDB)

When you select the RDB DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the RDB-dependent fieldsappear on the dialog.


Operating Sequence

1. Key in the appropriate value for Database Name to specify the name of the databasethe schema accesses.


— OR —


— OR —


— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the form without creating a schema.

Create Schema (SYBASE)

When you select the SYBASE DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the SYBASE-dependent fields appear on the dialog.


Operating Sequence

1. Key in the appropriate values for the SYBASE-dependent fields. The following listexplains these fields:

— Database Name — Specifies the name of the database the schema accesses.

— Database Management System Location — Specifies the path where SYBASE isinstalled. This field is not used if SYBASE SQL Server 04.02.XX on Windows NT isthe database server. See the README.TXT file delivered with the RISSYBDSproduct more more information.



— DSQUERY — Specifies the database query listener. It is the alias given in theinterface file. The SYBASE SQL Server 04.02.XX on Windows NT does not use theinterface file, so this field is not necessary for this server.

— IFILE — Specifies the interface filename. This field is not used if the SYBASE SQLServer 04.02.XX is the database server.


— OR —


— OR —



— OR —


Create Schema (OS400)

When you select the OS400 DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the OS400-dependentfields appear on the dialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Key in the appropriate values for the OS400-dependent fields. The following listexplains these fields:

— Database Name — Specifies the name of the AS/400 SQL collection where usertables are located and new tables are created. The value must be a valid AS/400library name.

— RIS Dictionary Database Name — Specifies the name of the AS/400 SQLcollection where the RIS dictionary objects are located. This may be the same asDatabase Name, but need not be. The value must be a valid AS/400 library name.

— OS400 Network Protocol — Specifies the path where the RDBMS is installed forUNIX. This field is disabled for Windows NT.

— Mode Name — Specifies the SNA mode name used to connect to the AS/400. Thevalue is supplied by your AS/400 System Administrator. The value must be enteredin uppercase.

— OS Username — Specifies the operating system username.

— Password — Specifies the password for the operating system username.


— RIS LU Name — Specifies the local SNA LU name used to connect to the AS/400.

The value is supplied by your AS/400 System Administrator. The value must beentered in uppercase.

— Host LU Name — Specifies the remote SNA name used to connect to the AS/400.The value is supplied by your AS/400 System Administrator. The value must beentered in uppercase.

— Host Program Name — Specifies the name of the RIS OS/400 TransactionProcessor program. The value is supplied by your AS/400 System Administrator.The value must be entered in uppercase, as PROGRAM or LIBRARY/PROGRAM, assupplied by your AS/400 System Administrator.

The values for Mode Name, RIS LU name, and Host LU Namemust also be configured in the SNA software configuration for thegateway server.


— OR —


— OR —


— OR —



Drop Schema

The Drop Schema dialog is used to drop schemas using the information you specify andcorresponds directly to the RIS drop schema statement.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Drop Schema button from the Schema Definition dialog.

The Drop Schema dialog is displayed.

2. Key the schema name into the Schema Name field on the Drop Schema dialog, orselect a schema from the schema list on the RIS Schema Manager dialog.

If the schema is a secure schema, a subform is displayed.

Enter the database username, database password, operating system username, andoperating system password in the subform, if displayed.

3. Select the Run button to execute the dialog and drop the schema.

— OR —


The Force button removes the schema regardless of who RIS thinks maybe using it.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the Drop Schema form without dropping the schema.


Secure Schema Access

The Secure Schema Access dialog provides access privileges to a secure schema.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Secure Schema Access button from the Schema Definition dialog.

The Secure Schema Access dialog displays. If a schema has already been selectedfrom the RIS Schema Manager dialog, this schema information displays on theSecure Schema Access dialog.

2. Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager dialog or key in a schema name todisplay information about a schema, if the schema you want is not already the activeschema.

A subform is displayed.


3. Select the Action toggle and the Privilege toggle to choose between granting andrevoking resource and connect privileges.

4. Specify a username.

5. Select the Run button to grant or revoke secure schema access.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the Secure Schema Access form without altering aschema.


Dictionary Access

This dialog grants and revokes access to a dictionary for a selected user.

Operating Sequence

Select the Dictionary Access button from the Schema Definition dialog.

The Dictionary Access dialog is displayed.




2. Select the Action toggle to choose between granting and revoking access.

3. Enter the name of the user to be granted or revoked access in the Selected User field.

4. Select the Run button to grant or revoke dictionary access.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the dialog without granting or revoking dictionaryaccess.


Modify Schema Password Form

This dialog lets you modify the schema password.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Modify Schema Password dialog from the Schema Definition form.

The Modify Schema Password dialog is displayed.

2. Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager dialog or key in a schema name todisplay information about a schema, if there is no active schema.

3. Key in the new password.



4. Key in the original password.

5. Select the Run button to alter the schema. You must select the Run button after eachaction to alter the schema.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the dialog without altering the schema.


Modify Node Information

This dialog lets you modify node information.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Modify Node Information form from the Schema Definition form.

The Modify Node Information dialog is displayed.

2. Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager or key in a schema name to displayinformation about a schema.

3. Select the Modify Node button from the dialog. The current addresses display in theNodename or Address fields.

Key in the new names or addresses in the fields. This action can also be used to changethe order of the protocols.

4. Select the Modify User Password button. The database user associated with theschema appears in the DB Username field. (This is a read-only field.)

5. Key in the database user password in the Password field.

This action does not change the user’s operating system account password.It changes only the RIS product copy of the user password. Typically, thiscommand is executed after users change their operating system accountpasswords. Otherwise, an error occurs.


6. Select the Modify OS User & Password button. The operating system user

associated with the schema appears in the OS Username field. Key in a newusername.

7. Key in the operating system user password in the Password field.

8. Select the Run button. You must select the Run button after each action to alter theschema.

— OR —

Select the Close button exit the dialog without altering the schema.


Modify DB2 Password

This dialog lets you modify the DB2 password.

This operation is valid only for DB2 schemas.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Modify DB2 Password button from the Schema Definition form.

The Modify DB2 Password form is displayed.


3. Key in the original password and the new password. The Alternate LU62 Mode fieldappears if this information is required. Key in the LU6.2 mode value if the fielddisplays.

4. Select the Run button to alter the schema. This action changes both the MVS systempassword and the schema password. You must select the Run button after each actionto alter the schema.

— OR —



Data Definition

The Data Definition dialog displays information about the tables, views, and indexesdefined for the specified schema.

The Data Definition function can perform six data definition actions. It can:

1. Display table information

2. Create tables

3. Drop tables

4. Alter tables

5. Include tables

6. Exclude tables

When one of these actions is selected, a subform associated with that action displays.

If the selected schema requires a password, or a database username/passwordand operating system username/password, the information must be keyed inbefore the subforms can accept input.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Data Definition button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. The DataDefinition dialog is displayed.

2. Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager form or key in a schema name, if theschema you want is not already the active schema.


3. Select one of the six actions to perform.

4. Select the Close button to exit the dialog.


Table Information

The Table Information dialog displays the definition of the specified table. The columnfields display information such as the column position, column name, column type, andwhether or not nulls are permitted in the column for each column in the table. Also, a field isprovided to search for specific columns.

This dialog only displays information; it is not editable.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Table Information button from the Data Definition dialog. The TableInformation form is displayed.

2. Select a table by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting thetable from the list on the Data Definition dialog.

3. Select the Close button to exit the dialog.


Create Table Form

The Create Table dialog creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definitionform. If the name of an existing table is keyed in to the Table Name field, or selected fromthe list on the Data Definition dialog, the definition of that table is loaded into the CreateTable dialog. This can be useful when creating several similar tables.

The Create Table form creates new tables. It cannot be used to modifyexisting tables. The ability to load existing table definitions into the form existsonly to provide a template, or starting point, for new tables.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Create Table button from the Data Definition dialog. The Create Tabledialog is displayed.

The Mode Control buttons are used to execute and reset the different modes of thedialog. The Create Table form operates in three modes that are represented by threebuttons:

— Insert Column – New columns can be added to the table definition. If a column isselected in the table definition list, the new column is inserted in front of theselected column. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. Select theMode Run button to insert the column.

— Drop Column – Columns can be dropped from the table definition. The column tobe dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column NameSearch field, or by selecting the column in the table definition list. Select the ModeRun button to drop the column.

— Modify Column – Column definitions can be modified. The column to be modifiedmust be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field,or by selecting the column in the table definition list. Select the Mode Run buttonto modify the column.


2. Select a table by keying in the table name in the Table Name field.

3. Select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the table.

— OR —

Select the Restore button to clear the dialog.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the dialog without creating the table.


Drop Table

This dialog is used to drop tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition dialog.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Drop Table button from the Data Definition dialog.

The Drop Table dialog is displayed.

2. Specify the table to be dropped by keying in the table name in the Table Name field orby selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition dialog.

3. Select the Run button to drop the table.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the dialog without dropping the table.


Alter Table

The Alter Table dialog is used to alter existing tables in the schema specified on the DataDefinition dialog. This form behaves like the RIS alter table command. It can onlyappend one new column at a time to an existing table.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Alter Table dialog from the Data Definition form. The Alter Table dialogis displayed.

2. Define the new column by entering the information in the fields of the ColumnDefinition to Append to Table area.

3. Select the Run button to execute the dialog and alter the table. Repeat Step 1 to defineanother new column.

— OR —

Select the Restore button to clear the dialog.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the dialog.


Include

This dialog lets you include tables and views from the in-memory data dictionary.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Include button from the Data Definition dialog. The Include dialog isdisplayed.

2. Key in, or select from the list, the names you want to include.

3. Set the Type toggle to the appropriate setting.


— OR —


— OR —



Exclude

This dialog lets you exclude tables and views from the in-memory data dictionary.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Exclude button from the Data Definition dialog. The Exclude dialog isdisplayed.

2. Key in, or select from the list, the names you want to exclude.

3. Set the Type toggle to the appropriate setting.


— OR —


— OR —



Schema File

This dialog lets you review and manipulate schema files.

By default, RIS maintains the schema file /usr/ip32/risschemas, which tracks the schemasknown to RIS.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Schema File button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. The SchemaFile dialog is displayed.

2. Select one of the control buttons on the right side of the form. If you select the LocateSchema File button, all the fields become active, letting you key in the appropriatevalues.

— Show Schema File Location — Produces read-only information on the specifiedschema file.

— Locate Schema File — Lets you rename your schema file or specify a differentprotocol.

— Checksum Schema File — Recomputes the checksum for the specified schema file.

Checksum is a mechanism used to verify that the schema file has notbeen corrupted. If you manually edit the file (instead of makingchanges through the RIS Schema Manager), checksum is no longeraccurate.

3. Key in the appropriate values on the dialog when the Locate Schema File button isselected. The following list explains the different parts of the Schema File dialog.

— Local, XNS, TCP, Decnet — This checklist lets you select a protocol for yourschema file.

— Schema File Name — Specifies the name of a schema file. The full pathname forthe schema file must be specified unless the RIS HOME directory (the defaultdirectory) is intended.


— Nodename or Address — Specifies the nodename or address where the schema

file resides. If the complete path is not specified, the filename is assumed to belocated where RIS was installed.

— Username — Specifies a system username that has access to the schema file.

A schema file must be readable by all users that are permitted toaccess the schemas. A schema file must be readable and writable byall users authorized to create, alter, or drop schemas. The userspermitted to create, alter, and drop schemas must be able to create anddelete files in the directory where the schema file is located.

— Password — This field specifies a system password associated with Username.

4. Select the Run button to execute the dialog.

— OR —

Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without changing the schema.


Locate Client

The Locate Client dialog is used to review and specify the location of a RIS client process.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Locate Client button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. The LocateClient dialog is displayed.

2. Key in the nodename or address.

3. Key in the name of the database user.

4. Key in the database user password, if any.

5. Select one of the following:

— Local

— TCP

— XNS

— Decnet

6. Select the Show Client Location button to show the current location of the RIS Clientprocess.

7. Select the Locate Client button to specify a new location for the RIS Client process.

8. Select the Run button to reload the client.

— OR —

Select the Restore button to clear all the fields.

— OR —

Select the Close button to exit the Locate Client dialog without relocating the client.


Set

The Set dialog sets the ANSI mode on or off, Autorename on or off, and enables differentdatabases.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Set button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. The Set dialog isdisplayed.

The default setting is Mode ANSI: On, Autorename: On, andDatabase Enable: All. Setting any of these functions only affects theremainder of the RIS Schema Manager session.

You can modify only one mode at a time.

2. Select the Set Mode ANSI button and set the Mode ANSI toggle to ON or OFF.

— If you set the Mode ANSI toggle to ON, schema, table, column, view, and indexnames are limited to 18 characters. Use this mode only when creating names (fortables, columns, and so forth) that should be ANSI compliant (18 characters, orfewer.)

— If you set the Mode ANSI toggle to OFF, Names can be up to 31 characters long,based upon the underlying RDBMS. Remember, though, that these names may notbe portable.

3. If you Set Autorename on, schema, table, column, view, and index names are longerthan the particular database limitation. RIS will automatically do renaming.

4. Select the Set Database Enable button to specify RDBMSs that can be used. Use thisfunction when you want to create table or column names that conflict with thekeywords of other databases.


5. Select the Run button to execute the dialog.

— OR —

Select the Restore button to clear the fields.

— OR —

Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without setting the mode or enablingdatabases.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Rotate (Dialog Builder)

The Rotate command places a Rotate button, which moves the raster image in the windowarea in a counter-clockwise direction.

Dialog Options

When you select Rotate, the Rotate dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Rotate Raster (Raster Graphics)

The Rotate Raster command moves the raster image in the window area in a counter-clockwise direction.

DB Access Commands S - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Save Dialog (Dialog Builder)

Select the Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) command to save the current dialog to a templatelibrary. If a dialog with the same name exists in the library, you must confirm that you wantto replace the previous version.

The Save command is also available from the Toolbar.

Dialog Options

When you select a Save function, the DBA Save Template dialog appears.

Library — This field displays the name of the current template library. You can selectthe field and key in the name of a different template library. You can create a newtemplate library by keying in a template library name that does not exist (full orrelative filename). You are asked to confirm that you want to create a new library.

Name — This field displays the name of the current template (if one exists). Select thefield and key in a new name.

Description — This field lets you enter a description of the template.

S - 2 DB Access Commands

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Save function.

The Save Template dialog appears.

2. Accept the default values or edit the fields as necessary. Select OK to save thetemplate.

The template is written to the specified library. If a template with the same namealready exists in the library, you are asked to confirm that you want to replace the oldtemplate with the new one.

a. Select Yes to replace the existing template with the new one.

b. Select No to cancel the write.

— OR —

Select Cancel to dismiss the dialog without saving the template.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Save Options

Use the Save button on the Design Options dialog to save commonly used parameters toan optional template.

Dialog Options





Operating Sequence








— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Save Report

The Save Report command saves the current report to a template library. If a templatewith the same name exists in the library, you must confirm that you want to replace theprevious version.

In most cases, errors received while saving a report template are only warnings.Usually, the report template is written successfully.

Dialog Options






Operating Sequence







— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Schema Select (Dialog Builder)

The Schema Select command places a Schema field that lets a user select a new currentschema.

Dialog Options

When you select Schema Select, the Schema Select dialog appears.

Simple — This radio button makes a Simple combo box. The list is always displayed,and text can be entered in the field.


Dropdown — This radio button makes a Dropdown combo box. The list is displayedwhenever the arrow is chosen, and ANY text can be entered in the field without beingin the list.

Dropdown List — This radio button makes a ADropdown List combo box. The listis displayed whenever the arrow is chosen, and text can NOT be entered in the field(that is, only selections from the list can be used).

Use the Predefined list values field of the List option to provide a schemalist. This lets a database dialog or single-table report run on several selectedschemas without setting DBA_SCHEMA_LIST.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Scrollbar (Dialog Builder)

The Scrollbar command places a scroll bar. You can use scripts to set or read the value ofthe scroll bar. The values can be set through the FIg_set_value script function, or by a datalink from another gadget.

Dialog Options

When you select Scrollbar, the Scrollbar dialog appears.

The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, andLocation options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of theseoptions.

High Value — This field specifies the maximum value of the scroll slider (that is, whenit is positioned at the far right for a horizontal scroll bar or the top for a vertical scrollbar).

Low Value — This field specifies the minimum value of the scroll slider (that is, whenit is positioned at the far left for a horizontal scroll bar or the bottom for a vertical scrollbar).

Viewable Portion — This field specifies the percentage of the scroll area filled by theslider. It also controls the increment by which the display changes when the top orbottom scroll arrows are selected (that is the size of a page). Key in a value between 1and 100.


Vertical Scroll Bar/Horizontal Scroll Bar — This toggle specifies whether the scrollbar moves the field display from top to bottom or from left to right.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Select Redlines (Dialog Builder)

The Select Redlines command places a Select Redlines button, which selects the redlineson the drawing by the user.

Dialog Options

When you select Select Redlines, the Select Redlines dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Set Query (Dialog Builder)

The Set Query command places a Set Query button, which lets you initialize the querycriteria, load a saved query template, and process the query criteria in one step.

You associate a saved query template with a Set Query button. When a user selects the SetQuery button, the query criteria is initialized, and the specified template is loaded from thetemplate library and processed to generate a universe of rows.

Dialog Options

When you select Set Query, the Set Query dialog appears.



Template — This field lets you specify the name of the query template to associatewith the function button. You can key in a template name or use the list indicator toselect from the query templates in the current template library.

At runtime, the user’s current template library (set with the DBA_LIBenvironment variable) should contain a query template with the namespecified in the Template field.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Show Group (Dialog Builder)

The Show Group command lets you highlight all gadgets in a given group.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Show Links (Dialog Builder)

The Show Links command places a Show Links button, which displays linkages in thespecified window.

Dialog Options

When you select Show Links, the Show Links dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Show Links (Raster Graphics)

The Show Links command displays linkages in the specified window. When you selectShow Links and a window, any databases, notes, or file linkages display.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Single Column (Dialog Builder)

The Single Column command lets you place a single column field on the current dialog.The dialog can be a Database dialog (that is, associated with a specific schema and table) orit can be a No Database dialog.

DB Access stores the column name/number associated with the column field. When youselect the Process Query button on the dialog, the single column field displays values forthe specified column from the universe of rows generated by the Process Query.

Database Dialog

You can place a single column field for a specified table and column on a Database dialog. Ifyou place a single column field for a coded column, the field is placed with a list indicator,which lets you select values from the column’s associated code list. Coded single columnfields can also present a subset of the code list by supplying values in the predefined listvalues field. You can also have list indicators for non-coded single column fields. For eithercoded or noncoded single column fields, restrict the user’s choices to the list by setting theVerify against list toggle on the Default/Verify dialog.

Use single column fields to link information from two or more tables by way of join columns.For example, in the sample database, the tables parts and sale both contain the columnpart_num. You can design a dialog that accesses information in both tables based on thecommon column value (part_num). See the section Join Columns.


No Database Dialog

Single column fields on No Database dialogs are associated with the current table atruntime. If no current table is specified or if the current table has no corresponding column,no information displays in the field.

Dialog Options

When you select Single Column, the Single Column dialog appears.


Length — This field specifies the character length of the column field.

Decimal Places — This field specifies the number of decimal places for a numericcolumn.

Codelist Rows — This field lets you specify how many entries from the code listappear at one time. Scroll through the list to see additional entries. This field isinactive until a coded column is specified in the Column field.

Minimum Value — This field lets you specify a minimum value that you can entersuccessfully for the column field. This field is active only for numeric columns.

Maximum Value — This field lets you specify a maximum value that the user canenter successfully for the column field. This field is active only for numeric columns.

Field Options — This subdialog lets you call other dialogs to set further parameters.Select from Editing, Scrolling, List, and Default/Verify. The respective dialogs aredescribed in the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder).


By using the Default/Verify option Default field values, you can override the

default value for the single column field provided by mscolumns. By using theDefault/Verify option Format string, you can override the original formatstring for a numeric single column field provided by mscolumns.

You can wrap long single column fields in a multiple line display. The lines areconcatenated before database processing. DB Access allows notification onwrapped fields without carriage return. This supports the Editing optionNotify at end.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Single Column from the Dialog Builder menu panel.

The Single Column dialog appears.


— OR —

At the Schema and/or Table field, enter a new schema and/or table using key-in or thelist indicator.



— Then —

Specify whether the join is an outer join. Select OK to return to the Single Columndialog.

The DBA Join Columns dialog disappears. The Join Columns button on the SingleColumn dialog is active.

4. At the Column field on the Single Column dialog, use a key-in or the list indicator toenter the name of the column from the secondary table that you want to place.



If you selected Keyin and specified coordinates, the field is automatically placed on thedialog.

— OR —

If you selected Data Point, the field is dynamically attached to the cursor. The x,ycoordinates appear in the message area so you can position the field.

Place the field by clicking the left mouse button.

— OR —

Select Cancel to end the field placement.

Once you establish a join column between two tables, you can place additionalcolumn fields (single or multiple) from the secondary table. The DBA JoinColumns dialog does not reappear.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Single Report (Dialog Builder)

The Single Report command places a Report button, which is linked to a report templatein the current template library. When you select Report, the report template is processedand the report output is written to the screen. You can specify a saved query criteriatemplate to generate the input universe of rows for the report; otherwise, the currentuniverse of rows is used.

The current template library at runtime must contain the specified reporttemplate (and optional query criteria template). You can specify the correcttemplate library for the user by defining and exporting the DBA_LIB variablein the user’s .profile file. See the section DM/DB Access EnvironmentVariables.


Dialog Options

When you select Single Report, the Single Report dialog appears.

Report Template — This field lets you associate a report template with the Reportbutton. You can key in a template name or use the list indicator to select a template.

Current Query/Saved Query — This toggle lets you specify whether to use thecurrent query criteria or a saved query criteria template to generate the input universeof rows for the report. The query criteria template must exist in the same templatelibrary as the report template.

Display Output/No Display — This toggle lets you specify whether the report outputis displayed to the screen after processing. The report output is also written to thedefault output file.

Query Template — This field lets you specify a query criteria template to generate theinput universe of rows for the report. You can key in a template name or use the listindicator to select a template. This field is active only when Saved Query is toggledon.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Slider (Dialog Builder)

The Slider command places a slider with a range of values to be used with a particularcommand. The values can be through the FIg_set_value script function, or by a data linefrom another gadget.

Dialog Options

When you select Slider, the Slider dialog appears.


Values — This set of boxes lets you define the high, initial, and low values appearingon the slider.

Display — This set of boxes lets you control the display of the high, current, and lowslider values. A check mark signals to display the value.

Vertical — This toggle lets you determine the orientation of the slider. It can be eithervertical or horizontal.


Minimum to Maximum — This toggle lets you determine which value appears first.

— Minimum to Maximum — The low value appears at the bottom if the slider isvertical and on the left if the slider is horizontal.

— Maximum to Minimum — The low value appears at the top if the slider is verticaland on the right if the slider is horizontal.

Increment — This field lets you set the increments the slider moves by.

Length — This field lets you specify the number of characters on the slider button.

Decimal — This field lets you set the number of decimal places displayed for the slidervalues.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Spin Box (Dialog Builder)

The Spin Box command places a spin box on the current dialog, for cycling through a rangeof values.

Dialog Options

When you select Spin Box, the Spin Box dialog appears.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________SQL Statement (Dialog Builder)

The SQL Statement command places an SQL Statement gadget on the current dialog.When selected, the gadget will process the SQL statement associated with the gadget.

Dialog Options

When you select SQL Statement, the SQL Statement dialog appears.



Template — This field lets you specify the name of the SQL template to associate withthe button. Key in the template name or select from the associated list.

The current template library at runtime must contain the specified SQLtemplate. You can specify the correct template library for the user bydefining and exporting the DBA_LIB variable in the user’s .profile file.See the section DM/DB Access Environment Variables.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Symbol (Dialog Builder)

The Symbol command lets you place symbols or bitmaps on the current dialog. DB Accesscan display symbols from Clipper sym files, or .bmp (bitmap) files that have been saved in thetemplate library with the Bitmap Loader.

You can create symbols with the Symbol Editor, a baseline product deliveredwith all Intergraph systems. See the Symbol Editor User’s Guide forinformation on using the Symbol Editor.

Dialog Options

When you select Symbol, the Symbol dialog appears.

The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Location options. Seethe section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for descriptions of these options.

Symbol File — This field displays the name of the symbol file. By default, dbasym isspecified. To specify a different symbol file, clear the field and key in a new file name.

If this file is not in the c:\win32app\ingr\dba\support directory, youmust define DBA_SUPPORT to include the directory path of the file. Seethe section DM/DB Access Environment Variables.

Symbol ID — This field displays the number of the symbol file to be loaded.

Bitmap — Allows placement of a Bitmap template. For more information see BitmapLoader.


Symbols — This field displays the DBA Symbol Selection dialog. You can select asymbol from this dialog to place on a dialog. These symbols are used in the DB Accessproduct.

When you select Symbols, the Symbol Selection dialog appears.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________System Command (Dialog Builder)

The System Command command places a System Command button, which you canassociate with a system command. When a user selects the button, the command isexecuted. DB Access will not wait until the system command completes if the global variabledba_system_no_wait is true. The dba_system_window determines whether a window will bedisplayed. See c:\win32app\ingr\doc\globals.txt for a description of these variables.

Dialog Options

When you select System Command, the System Command dialog appears.



Command — This field lets you specify the system command to associate with thebutton.

Operating Sequence


DB Access Commands T - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Table Select (Dialog Builder)

The Table Select command places a Table field that lets a user select a new current table.

Dialog Options

When you select Table Select, the Table Select dialog appears.


T - 2 DB Access Commands

List Rows — This field lets you specify how many tables will display at one time in theassociated list field for the Table field. For example, if the current schema containsfive tables, a value of 3 would cause three tables to appear in the list field. The scrollbar provides access to the remaining tables.

Simple — This radio button makes a Simple combo box. The list is always displayed,and text can be entered in the field.

Dropdown — This radio button makes a Dropdown combo box. The list is displayedwhenever the arrow is chosen, and ANY text can be entered in the field without beingin the list.

Dropdown List — This radio button makes a Dropdown List combo box. The list isdisplayed whenever the arrow is chosen, and text can NOT be entered in the field (thatis, only selections from the list can be used.)

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Text (Dialog Builder)

The Text command lets you place text strings on the current dialog. You can select text fontfrom the common dialog. Placing text lets you name dialogs and label areas on those dialogs.

Dialog Options

When you select Text, the Text dialog appears.

The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Location, and TextFont options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for descriptions of these options.

Text String — This field specifies the text string to be placed. You can key in severallines of text.

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Text Box (Dialog Builder)

The Text Box command places text box on the current dialog, for text entry/display.

Dialog Options

When you select Text Box, the Text Box dialog appears.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Text (Report Builder)

The Text (Report Builder) command places a field that prints a literal text string youassign. Text fields are used to print text that remains the same in a report: titles, columnheaders, and so on. Text fields are commonly placed on preface, top, bottom, and final lines.

Menu Options

When you select Text (Report Builder), the DBA Text Field dialog appears.


Text — This field lets you specify the text string to print.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Text Size

The Text Size command lets you change the size of the text display on a report template or areport output dialog. Make the text smaller to see more fields at the same time. Make thetext larger to make the display easier to read.

The text size setting can be saved as part of a design options template, using the SaveOptions command.

Dialog Options

When you select Text Size, the Text Size dialog appears.

Use the slider to set the text size. Text sizes range from 1 to 5. You may set theenvironment variable DBA_TEXT_SIZE to globally define the text size. Example: setDBA_TEXT_SIZE=1


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Time

The Time command places a field that prints the system time in a format that you choose.You usually place time fields on a top or preface line.

Dialog Options

When you select Time, the Time Field dialog appears.


Time Formats — This checklist lets you select the print format for the time field.

Operating Sequence


DB Access Commands U - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Undelete Fence (Dialog Builder)

The Undelete Fence (Dialog Builder) command restores the last fenced area deleted withthe Fence Delete (Dialog Builder) command.

Operating Sequence

Select Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Fence and then Undelete from thepulldown menus.

The last deleted fenced area is restored in its original location.

U - 2 DB Access Commands

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Undelete Field (Report Builder)

The Undelete Field (Report Builder) command restores the last field deleted with theDelete Field command.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field and then Undelete from thepulldown menus.


The field is dynamically attached to the cursor. As you move the cursor over the reporttemplate, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column,table, and field.



DB Access restores the field to the specified position.

3. Continue to copy the field to new positions.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Undelete Gadget (Dialog Builder)

The Undelete Gadget (Dialog Builder) command restores the last gadget deleted with theDelete Gadget (Dialog Builder) command.

Operating Sequence

Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and then Undelete from the pulldownmenus.

The last deleted gadget is restored in its original location.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Undelete Group (Dialog Builder)

The Undelete Group (Dialog Builder) command restores the last gadget group deletedwith the Group Delete (Dialog Builder) command.

Operating Sequence

Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and then Undelete from the pulldownmenus.

The last deleted gadget group is restored in its original location.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Undelete Line (Report Builder)

The Undelete Line (Report Builder) command restores the last line deleted with theDelete Line command.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Line and then Undelete from thepulldown menus.


The line is dynamically attached to the cursor. As you move the cursor over the reporttemplate, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column,table, and field.


DB Access restores the line to the specified position.

3. Continue to copy the line to new positions.

— OR —



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Update View (Dialog Builder)

The Update View command places an Update View button, which refreshes the specifiedraster window.

Dialog Options

When you select Update View, the Update View dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Update (Raster Graphics)

The Update command refreshes the selected window. To use the command, select Updateand then a window.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Update Active (Database Edit)

The Update Active command places the dialog in update active mode. You can changecurrently displayed column values without changing the corresponding values for the currentrow. Select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row in the database. For moreinformation, see the section Insert Row (Database Edit).

Operating Sequence

The following sequence demonstrates how Update Active can be used with Insert Row tocreate a new row.

1. Select Update Active.

The Update Active button appears to be depressed. The dialog is in update activemode; you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database.

2. Select a column field. Key in a value to be contained in the new row.


4. Select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a new row in the database.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Update Active (Dialog Builder)

The Update Active command places an Update Active button, which lets a user establishcolumn values for a row before inserting it in the database.

The Update Active function overrides the default key-in mode for the column field(s). Theuser can enter data without changing the displayed row in the database (change row), addingquery criteria (add query), or performing a key column search (key column). When the datais correct, the user can select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row in thedatabase.


Dialog Options

When you select Update Active, the Update Active dialog appears.


Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Update Row (Database Edit)

The Update Row command places the dialog in update row mode. You can changecurrently displayed column values without changing the corresponding values for the currentrow. You can then select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row in the database.For more information, see the section Insert Row (Database Edit).

Operating Sequence

The following sequence demonstrates how Update Row can be used with Insert Row tocreate a new row.

1. Select Update Row.

The Update Row button appears to be depressed. The dialog is in update row mode;you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database.

2. Select a column field. Key in a value to be contained in the new row.


4. Select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a new row in the database.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Update Row (Dialog Builder)

The Update Row command places an Update Row button, which updates the current rowbased on the currently displayed column values.

Dialog Options

When you select Update Row, the Update Row dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Undo Redlines (Dialog Builder)

The Undo Redlines command places a Undo Redlines button, which undo the redlines onthe drawing by the user that were previous attached.

Dialog Options

When you select Undo Redlines, the Undo Redlines dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________User Gadgets (Dialog Builder)

The User Gadgets are available from the DB Access Dialog Builder Toolbox. These gadgetshave no builtin function. You can use script to read or write their values, or assign them abuiltin function from the Common Dialog.

Text Box — This command places a Text Box button on the current dialog, fortext entry/display.

Multi-Column Field — This command places a Multi-Column Field button onthe current dialog, for multi-column text entry/selection/display.

List Box — This command places a List Box button on the current dialog, fortext selection.

Grid — This command places a Grid on the current dialog, for multi-column textselection.

Combo Box — This command places a Combo Box on the current dialog.

Field Plus — This command places a Field Plus on the current dialog. A FieldPlus gadget is a custom control that offers full I/Forms functionality.


Check Box/Radio Button — This command places a Checklist Box or RadioButton on the current dialog, to display parameter states (on/off).

Button — This command places a text, bitmap or symbol button.

Symbol — This command places a Symbol or Bitmap on the current dialog.

Scrollbar — This command places a Scrollbar that can display a range ofvalues. Use scripts to define the function or read the value of the scrollbar.

Slider — This command places a Slider that can display a range of values. Usescripts to define the function or read the value of the slider.

Text — This command places Text annotation on the current dialog.

Group Box — This command places a Group Box on the current dialog, to groupa set of like-functioned gadgets.

Spin Box — This command places a Spin Box on the current dialog for cyclingthrough a range of values.

Rectangle — This command places a Rectangle on the current dialog. You canselect line weight, line style.

Line — This command places a Line which the user can change the line weightand/or line style.

Gauge — This command places a Gauge that can display a percentage (from 1 to100).

Dial — This command places a Dial that can display a range of values.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________User Variable (Report Builder)

The User Variable (Report Builder) command lets you create variables for use in scripts,user action statements, and derived fields. You can create variables to store three types ofdata: character, integer, and floating point.

Arrays

You can create single- and multi-dimension arrays. Single-dimension arrays areautomatically resized if an element outside the array’s current size is referenced. Multi-dimension arrays are not automatically resized.

For example, an integer variable num with an x array value of 10 is referenced by num[0]through num[9]. If num is referenced by an x subscript greater than the initial size, thevariable is extended and processing continues.

Character Variables

Character user variables are designed to store text strings. For a single text string, the xsize determines the length of the string, and the y size is set to 1. For an array of textstrings, the x size determines the number of text strings allocated, and the y size determinesthe length of each.


Dialog Options

When you select User Variable, the DBA User Variable dialog appears.

Name, Type, X, Y — This select-only field lists the name, variable type, x size, and ysize of the user variables defined for the current report template.

Select a line to make it a marker (highlighted) line. The dialog cannot be in delete oredit mode. (That is, the Delete and Edit buttons are not depressed.) New variablescan be added and the delete buffer inserted before a marker line.

Add — This button adds a variable to the user variable list. Select Add after you enterinformation in the Name, X Size, and Y Size fields and select a variable type at thebottom of the dialog. The new variable is inserted before the marker line in the uservariable list. If no marker line exists, the new variable is inserted at the bottom of thelist.

Edit — This button places the dialog in edit mode. Select Edit and then select avariable from the user variable list. The values for the variable appear in the area atthe bottom of the dialog. You can edit these values.

Delete — This button puts the dialog in delete mode; any line you select is deleted andstored in a delete buffer. The delete buffer stores deleted lines until you exit deletemode. Select Delete again to exit delete mode. The delete buffer is cleared wheneveryou enter delete mode.

Undelete — This button inserts the current delete buffer before the marker line in theuser variable list. If no marker line exists, the delete buffer is inserted at the bottom ofthe list.

Name — This key-in field lets you specify the name of a new variable or edit the nameof an existing one.


Variable Type — This checklist lets you select a data type for the variable.

X Size — This key-in field lets you specify the x size of the variable.

Y Size — This key-in field lets you specify the y size of the variable.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________USTN Command (Dialog Builder)

The USTN Command places a MicroStation Key-in button, which lets you associate aMicroStation key-in command with the button you place. When the button is selected,MicroStation receives and executes the associated command.

Dialog Options

When you select USTN Command, the MicroStation Key-in dialog appears.


Command — This field specifies the MicroStation key-in command associated withthe button.


Operating Sequence


DB Access Commands W - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Window Area (Dialog Builder)

The Window Area command places a Window Area button, which displays the areaspecified by two points of a raster image.

Dialog Options

When you select Window Area, the Window Area dialog appears.


W - 2 DB Access Commands

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Window Area (Raster Graphics)

The Window Area command displays a specified area of a raster file. When you selectWindow Area and place two points in a window, the area defined by those points isdisplayed.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Window Center (Dialog Builder)

The Window Center command places a Window Center button, which brings the selectedpoints in a rater image to the center of the window.

Dialog Options

When you select Window Center, the Window Center dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Window Center (Raster Graphics)

The Window Center command, which bring the selected point in a raster image to thecenter.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Window Scroll (Dialog Builder)

The Window Scroll command places a Window Scroll button, which moves a raster imagefrom one specified point to another.

Dialog Options

When you select Window Scroll, the Window Scroll dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Window Scroll (Raster Graphics)

The Window Scroll command moves the window area from one specified point to another.When you select Window Scroll and place two points in a window, the first point is movedto the location of the second point.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Worksheet (Dialog Builder)

The Worksheet command lets you place a gadget containing multiple column fields on adialog. The dialog can be a Database dialog (that is, associated with a specific schema andtable) or it can be a No Database dialog. Unlike a standard multiple column field, aworksheet can display more than one row at a time.

When a user selects the Process Query button on the dialog, the worksheet displays valuesfor the specified columns from the universe of rows generated by the Process Query.

Database Dialog

Worksheets on Database dialogs are associated with a specified table or with joined tables.

You can use worksheets to link information from two or more tables by way of join columns.For example, in the sample database, the tables parts and sale both contain the columnpart_num. You can design a dialog that accesses information in both tables based on thecommon column value (part_num). See the section Join Columns.

No Database Dialog

Worksheets on No Database dialogs are associated with the current table at runtime. If nocurrent table is specified, no information will display in the worksheet.


Dialog Options

When you select Worksheet, the Worksheet dialog appears.

The following Multi Column Field (MCF) commands are enabled for the worksheet:

Visible rows — This field specifies the number of rows displayed simultaneously in thefield.

Visible columns — This field specifies the number of columns displayedsimultaneously in the field.

Header label — This field specifies an additional MCF. This MCF functions as aheader and horizontally scrolls in parallel with the original MCF.

Column width —These radio buttons determine how individual columns are sized forworksheets. They are disabled if the MCF has no database hook.

Vertical scroll — This check box lets the MCF scroll vertically.

Display vertical scrollbar — This check box displays the vertical scrollbar. Withoutit, the MCF can be scrolled with the arrow keys.

Vertical scroll notify — This check box causes scripts on the MCF to be processedwhen vertically scrolled.

Column scrolling — This check box enables column scrolling so that invisible columnscan be displayed.


Row select buttons — This check box determines whether or not row select buttonsare available on the MCF. Row select buttons notify DB Access of the row numberselected.

Entire row selection — This check box lets you specify how a tap on a particular cellis interpreted. Single cell selection means that a tap activates only that field, andEntire row selection means that a tap on a cell activates all fields in the row.

CR Required — This check box lets you set this mode which forces you to press aCarriage Return before input to the MCF is processed.

Column info — This field allows setting of attributes for individual columns of theMCF.

Data type — These radio buttons let you specify the type of data to be entered in thefield. Select ASCII, Integer, or Decimal.

Justification — These radio buttons let you specify the justification of the data to beentered in the field. Select Left, Center, or Right.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Worksheet from the Dialog Builder menu panel.

The Worksheet dialog appears.

a. If you are placing a worksheet on a Database dialog, go to Step 2.

b. If you are placing a worksheet on a No Database dialog, go to Step 3.

2. If you want to accept all default settings on the dialog, go to Step 3.

— OR —

Edit the dialog parameters as needed. For example:

a. To place a worksheet for another table:

— At the Schema and/or Table field, enter a new schema and/or table usingkey-in or the list indicator.



— At the Column field for the primary table, enter the name of the join columnusing key-in or the list indicator. Repeat for the secondary table.

— Specify whether the join is an outer join. Select Exit and Save to return tothe Worksheet dialog.

The DBA Join Columns dialog disappears. The Join Columns button on theWorksheet dialog is active. The Table field displays the name of the secondarytable.

You can now place worksheet(s) for the secondary table. Youmust reselect the primary (original) table to place worksheet(s)for it.

b. To specify an SQL select statement:

— Select the Based on select statement - YES toggle.

The Select statement field appears.

— Key in a select statement.

c. To exclude columns from the worksheet:

In the Columns field, select the columns you want to exclude.

d. To edit the Text field:

— Select the Include Selected Columns toggle.

— In the Text field, select and edit the column names.

— In the Columns field, select the columns you want to include.

3. Select OK from the Worksheet dialog to place the worksheet. If you selected Keyin andspecified coordinates, the worksheet is automatically placed on the dialog. A worksheetheader is attached.

— OR —

If you selected Data Point, the worksheet is dynamically attached to the screen cursor.The x,y coordinates appear in the message area so you can position the worksheet.


Place the worksheet by tapping the left mouse button.

The worksheet is placed in the specified location. A worksheet header is automaticallyattached.

— OR —

Select Cancel to abort the placement.

DB Access Commands Z - 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Zoom In (Dialog Builder)

The Zoom In command places a Zoom In button, which displays half as much of thespecified raster image at twice the resolution.

Dialog Options

When you select Zoom In, the Zoom In dialog appears.


Z - 2 DB Access Commands

Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Zoom In (Raster Graphics)

The Zoom In command displays half as much of the specified file at twice the resolution. Touse the command, select Zoom In and then place a point on the area to be magnified.


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Zoom Out (Dialog Builder)

The Zoom Out command places a Zoom Out button, which displays twice as much of thespecified raster image at half the resolution.

Dialog Options

When you select Zoom Out, the Zoom Out dialog appears.



Operating Sequence



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Zoom Out (Raster Graphics)

The Zoom Out command displays twice as much of the specified file at half the resolution.To use the command, select Zoom Out and the window.

Appendix A: DB Access Environment Variables AA - 1

Appendix A__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DB Access Environment Variables

AA - 2 Appendix A: DB Access Environment Variables


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Appendix A

DB Access Environment Variables

This section lists the environment variables that can be used by DB Access.

DBA_AUTOCOMMIT Determines whether DB Access can turn autocommitoff. See the filec:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\autocomm.txt.Default = NO

DBA_BG_COLOR Specifies the background color for the raster displaywhen raster graphics mode is active.Default = 15

DBA_BLANK_PAD Controls whether report output lines are padded withblanks to the length specified by columns per page.Default = NO

DBA_DEBUG Causes the script debugger to be automaticallyactivated upon startup. The command line switch -Dcan also be used.

DBA_BUTTON_SCRIPT Used to specify a script call when a button is pressed.Seec:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\butkey.txtfor more details.

DBA_CODE_SORT If YES, code lists are sorted by ascending code text.If NO, code lists are sorted by ascending code number.Default = NO

DBA_CONVERT_INPUT Specifies a script call that converts column valuesinput by the user before passing them to the database,so that the user can work with units other than thosestored in the database. Seec:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\convert.txt.

DBA_CONVERT_OUTPUT Specifies a script call that converts column valuesfrom the database for output on menus and reports, sothat the user can work with units other than thosestored in the database. Seec:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\convert.txt.


DBA_DAP_FILE Defines the text file that is used to associate the

report index number stored in a Displayable Attributewith the name of a report to run. There should be onereport name on each line of this file.

DBA_DB_NUMBERS Controls whether table and column specifications indialog and report templates are written out as names(the default) or numbers (used in conjunction withmscolumns for schemas where table and columnnames will be translated).

DBA_DEBUG Causes the script debugger to be automaticallyactivated upon startup. The command line switch -Dcan also be used.

DBA_ERROR_LOG Redirects messages from the Errors Detected form tothe specified file.

DBA_FG_COLOR Specifies the foreground color for the raster displaywhen raster graphics mode is active.Default = 0

DBA_FORMS_COLORS Controls whether Native or Shamrock fields are used(see doc/native.txt for details). 0 — fields areWindows native controls unless the Field PLUS checkbox is selected from the Dialog Builder. 1 — fieldsare always Windows native controls. 2 — fields arealways Shamrock custom controls.

DBA_FORMS_MODE Causes DM/DBA to take on the CLIX look-and-feel.Setting this variable sets DBA_FORMS_COLORSand DBA_NATIVE_MODE to 2.

DBA_HL_COLOR Specifies the highlight color for the raster displaywhen raster graphics mode is active.Default = 4

DBA_INITIAL_SCRIPT Specifies a script function to execute when DB Accessstarts. This can be used to initialize global variables.

DBA_JOIN_TO_MANY Causes DB Access to process secondary selects onouter and multi-schema joins when process query oruniverse review commands are issued to add duplicaterows caused by multiple hits in the secondary table.It increases processing times for these joins, andshould be used only when one-to-many or many-to-many relationships exists. This flag is not necessaryfor standard, single schema joins or for any reportjoins.Default = NO


DBA_KEY_SCRIPT Specifies a script call when a key is pressed.

Seec:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\butkey.txtfor more details.

DBA_LIB Set to the template library DBA will use initially.Default = none

DBA_LIB_LIST List the template libraries to search when loadingtemplatesDefault = none

DBA_LINK_MODE Determines type of linkage to be written to graphicelements by the Attach Linkage command, or readfrom graphic elements by the Review Element andLocate Graphics commands.Set to RIS for eight-word RIS (user data) linkages, orDMRS for standard four-word DMRS linkages.Default = "RIS"

DBA_LOG_MESSAGE Causes DB Access to redirect all messages (normallydisplayed in the message field or message gadget) tothe file specified by the DBA_LOG_ERROR shellvariable.Default = NO

DBA_MCE_RESTRICT This environment variable exists, you cannot invokeplacement, manipulation, or subprocess commands,effectively making the design file read-only.Default is unrestricted.

DBA_MENU Sets dialog template name that DB Access or DBAccess Runtime invokes initially.Default = none

DBA_MESSAGE_STRIP If NO, standard message strip is not displayed whiledialogs are processed.Default = YES

DBA_MSLINK Specifies his own MSLINK column, to be used inlinking database rows to MicroStation elements, or asa key column, or for DBA-driven incrementing of thekey column upon inserts of new rows. The columnmust be an integer, and should be uniquely indexed.Default = mslink


DBA_NATIVE_MODE Controls whether Native or Shamrock fields are used

(see doc/native.txt for details). 0 — fields areWindows native controls unless the Field PLUS checkbox is selected from the Dialog Builder. 1 — fieldsare always Windows native controls. 2 — fields arealways Shamrock custom controls.

DBA_NO_MSCATALOG Forces DB Access to build its table list fromRISTABLES instead of MSCATALOG even if it exists.Default = NO

DBA_NORMAL_TEXT Forces dialog text display style to be normal. Normaltext displays considerably faster under X Windows,especially on PCs.Default = NO

DBA_NO_READ_LOCK NFS-mounted template libraries are not be lockedwhen reading (loading templates), if true. Useful forread-only sessions when NFS file locking is notdesired. WARNING setting true may cause badreads if other users are writing to the library.Default = NO

DBA_NO_SCALING Overrides automatic resizing of forms and dialogsbased on screen size and based on resizing andmoving the main dialog.Default = NO

DBA_NO_STOP Disables the STOP sign on the DB Access messagestrip.Default = NO (STOP sign enabled.)

DBA_OBJECT_LIB Specifies the template library that compiled scriptobjects are written to. If not defined, they are writtento DBA_LIB.

DBA_OPTIMIZE Optimizes response for large databases.See c:588ngr\dba\doc\optimize.txt fordetails and operational differences.Default = NO

DBA_OPTIONS The name of an options template, used for settingactive design options such as font name and body size,grid lock, color, line style, line weight, line depth,default CR mode, text justification, text style, verbosemode, text size, or lines and columns per report page.


DBA_PARTITION_BITS Determines the number of bits to be ignored in the

occurrence number in DMRS linkages to partitionedentities on graphic elements (can be determined byusing DMRS on the VAX DMRS database, LIST e.!,where e is the entity number, use the PartitionNumber value). Can also be used to mask out thereuse counter, if set to zero (0).Default = 8

DBA_PAUSE Specifies an interval (in seconds) between inputswhen using the DBA_PLAYBACK_FILE option.Default is 1

DBA_PLAYBACK_FILE Specifies a file (created by DBA_RECORD_FILE) forplaying back all input from a previous DB Accesssession.

DBA_PLOT_QUEUE Provides a queue name for the plot commandwhenever a Plot Window button is selected.Default = ilp811

DBA_PRINT Provides a format string for the print command issuedwhenever a PRINT button is selected (the %s in thestring is replaced with the filename).Default = windows print dialog

DBA_RASTER Specifies the name of the raster graphics control file.Previously this was done with the -d switch; thisenvironment variable is now the preferred method.

DBA_RASTER_PATH Specifies a default pathname to search for raster files,this applies to the cosmetic and dynamic rastergadgets.

DBA_RECORD_FILE Specifies a file for recording all input in a DB Accesssession. This file can then be used in a subsequentplayback session (see DBA_PLAYBACK_FILE).

DBA_REPORT_MEMORY Used to preset report memory to be allocated so thatlarge reports do not fragment memory by repeatedlyadding small chunks. Set it to the number of bytesrequired to store all rows in memory (# of report rowstimes bytes per row, as specified by the Errorallocating report memory ... error message).Default is 100000

DBA_REPORT_NULLS Causes DBA to print an error message whenever ascript or a numeric field references a NULL columnvalue.Default = NO


DBA_SCHEMA Set to the schema name DBA connect to initially.

Default = none

DBA_SCHEMA_LIST Set to a string of schemas for multi-database joins.Default = none

DBA_SCRAP Causes characters deleted from DBA fields to be puton the EnvironV scrap (so they may be accessed byother I/Forms applications). Setting this variableslows down field editing noticeably.Default = NO

DBA_SHELL Provides a command string for the SHELL button onthe DBA Message Strip.Default = "xterm -shell"

DBA_STORE_SCRIPT Causes DB Access to write a compiled script object toDBA_OBJECT_LIB or DBA_LIB whenever a script iscompiled. DB Access then reads this object in futuresessions instead of recompiling the script again.Compiled objects are only read fromDBA_OBJECT_LIB or DBA_LIB.Default = NO

DBA_SUPPORT Sets to the DB Access support directories. (Onlynecessary when using multiple support paths.Separate paths with colons).Default = /usr/ip32/dba/support

DBA_SYNC_MENUS Causes DB Access to update all of the same tablewhen a menu’s current row is changed.Default = NO

DBA_TABLE_ORDER Lets you select order in which table lists are sorted.Default = mscatalog.entitynum (if mscatalog exists),or ristables.table_name (if mscatalog does not exist).

DBA_TEXT_SIZE Presets Report Builder and Output text size (1-5, fromthe Text Size form). If this shell variable is notdefined the default is 3.

DBA_TIMESTAMP_FORMAT Overrides the default input/output format fortimestamp columns.Seec:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\timestamp.txtfor format details.Default = "yyyy-mm-dd:hh:nn:ss"


DBA_TMP_OUTPUT When set, this flag causes all report output to be

placed in TMPDIR (usually /usr/tmp) with a uniquename. This makes it easy to clean up report output aswell as eliminating multiple user file conflicts.

DBA_TOPMOST Controls the window priority of DBA dialogs. If notset, DBA dialogs are normal priority. If set, DBAdialogs are always on top of nontopmost windows.This is useful when running DBA from MicroStation.

DBA_USE_SERVER Forces all DBA RIS commands to be channeledthrough a DBASRV connection. This option requiresthe -n <node> command line switch. It is useful toprevent DBA_NFM applications from creating anextra connection to the NFM database.

DBA_WRITE_ACCESS Set to YES for database write access, or NO for read-only.Default = YES

Certain global variables need only to be set to evaluate to true:

DBA_AUTOCOMMITDBA_BLANK_PADDBA_CODE_SORTDBA_DB_NUMBERS

DBA_MCE_RESTRICTDBA_NORMAL_TEXTDBA_NO_SCALINGDBA_OPTIMIZE

For example:

set DBA_DB_NUMBERS=

The equal sign (=) is required. You can also specify a value, such as:

set DBA_DB_NUMBERS=YES

If these environment variables are not exported, they default to NO.

The environment variables DBA_WRITE_ACCESS and DBA_MESSAGE_STRIP default toYES. You must set these variables to NO and export them to specify a condition other thanthe default. For example:

set DBA_WRITE_ACCESS=NO

set DBA_MESSAGE_STRIP=NO

Appendix B: DB Access Reserved Tables BB - 1

Appendix B__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DB Access Reserved Tables

BB - 2 Appendix B: DB Access Reserved Tables


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Appendix B

DB Access Reserved Tables

DB Access lets you create special reserved tables for various purposes. These tables areoptional unless otherwise noted.

mscatalog One means of providing for unique row identification. It isrequired by MicroStation 32 for databases used with graphics.mscatalog also maps table names to numbers for use withthe mscolumns table. You can translate table nameswithout changing the DB Access application.

mscolumns Supports the internationalization of DB Access. This tablecreates reference numbers for columns. You can translatecolumn names without changing the DB Access application.

mscodelist Required for a schema using coded columns.

dba_links Required for DB Access raster graphics.

dba_files Required for DB Access raster graphics.

dba_points Required for DB Access raster graphics.

The environment variable DBA_DB_NUMBERS can be set to YES to force DB Access towrite out dialogs and report templates referencing tables and columns by number instead ofname.

If you create a reserved table with the Create/Alter Table function of the Schema Editutility, DB Access automatically creates the columns for the table.

B.1 Tables Needed for Raster Graphics

B.2 Unique Row Identification

B.3 Coded Columns and mscodelist

B.4 mscolumns


B.1 Tables Needed for Raster Graphics

Several tables are required for DB Access raster graphics.

B.2 Unique Row Identification

DB Access requires unique row identification for the following Database Edit functions:

Change Row

Delete Row

Previous Row

Unique row identification is also required for DB Access to display the number of rowsgenerated by the Process Query command.

You can use any of three methods for unique row identification. Listed in order ofprecedence, they are:

1. Add an mslink column to each table.

2. Define one or more key columns in the mscatalog table.

3. Create a unique index for each table.

B.2.1 mslink Column

The default method for identifying unique rows is to add an mslink column to each table.This can be done through the Create/Alter Table dialog in the Schema Edit utility.

B.2.2 Key Columns (mscatalog Table)

The second method of identifying unique rows is to define one or more key columns in themscatalog table. If the mscatalog table does not exist, you can create it using the SchemaEdit utility.


The following are columns in an mscatalog table:

tablename char(32) (required)

alias_name char(32) (optional)

entitynum integer (required)

screenform char(64) (required for USTN)

reporttable char(64) (required for USTN)

sqlreview char(240) (required for USTN)

fencefilter char(240) (required for USTN)

dastable char(32) (required for USTN)

key_columns char(50)(optional)

nextocc integer (optional)

mslink integer (optional)

The tablename column must be identical to any RIS-supported database table name to beaccessed by DB Access. The alias_name column specifies a different name for the table thatis not bound by SQL standard restrictions. The entitynum column determines table number,and may be matched with DMRS entities in existing VAX templates.

The nextocc column provides a more efficient method of inserting rows with mslink columns.It eliminates the need for DB Access to issue the statement

select max (mslink) from <table>

in assigning an mslink value to the row inserted. You can set nextocc to the next mslinkvalue available for insert, or let DB Access maintain the value.

Any RIS-supported database table (ristables, mscatalog, and so forth) can be added to orremoved from mscatalog.

Defining Key Columns

Once the mscatalog table exists, you can define key columns for any table with an occurrencein the mscatalog table.

1. From the DB Access main dialog, select mscatalog as the current table. SelectDatabase Edit.

2. From the Database Edit dialog, create a universe of all tables with occurrences inmscatalog.


3. Make the table for which you want to define the key columns the current row.

4. At the key_columns column, key in one or more column names, separated by spaces.

The message Row changed appears.

5. Using the same process, define key columns for any other tables in mscatalog. Whenyou are finished, exit DB Access.

B.2.3 Unique Index

The third, and simplest, method for uniquely identifying rows in a non-graphic database is tocreate a unique index for a given table. From the SQL Statements dialog in DB Access, usethe SQL create index statement:

create [unique] index <index> on <table> (<column> [, <column> ...])

To create a unique index called friendex on the name and nickname columns of the friendstable:

create unique index friendex on friends (name, nickname)

B.3 Coded Columns and mscodelist

The mscodelist table has the following columns. All columns are required except mslink,which makes it easier to edit the table with Database Edit. See the section Unique RowIdentification.

table_name char(32)

column_name char(32)

join_table char(32)

code_column char(32)

text_column char(32)

index_column char(32)

index_value integer

mslink integer

For a column to be considered coded, it must have a row entry in mscodelist where:

table_name is the column table name.column_name is the column name.join_table is the table name of the code list.code_column is the name of an integer column in join_table.text_column is the name of a character column in join_table.


If multiple code lists are to be stored in one table, index_column is the name of an integercolumn in join_table that stores the index_value of each code list.

For example, the following mscodelist entries

table column join code text index indexname______ name______ table_____ column_______ column_______ column_______ value______

pipe material material code_number code_textpipe shape codelists code_number code_text index_num 2

would refer to two coded columns (material and shape) in the pipe table. The materialcolumn has its own code list (the join table named material) with the following columns:

code_number_____________ code_text_________

1 CONCRETE2 STEEL3 PVC

The shape column uses a shared code list (the join table named codelists) with the followingcolumns:

code_number_____________ code_text_________ index_num___________

1 CONCRETE 12 STEEL 13 PVC 11 CIRCULAR 22 RECTANGULAR 23 ELLIPTICAL 2

The shape column accepts values from rows in codelists where index_num is equal to 2.


B.4 mscolumns

The following are columns in the mscolumns table. Required columns are indicated.

entitynum integer (required)

attrnum integer (required)

column_name char(32) (required)

alias_name char(32)

column_format char(10)

default_value char(10)

mslink integer

The entitynum column determines table number. The attrnum column determines columnnumber. The column_name column specifies the name of the column (determined in thecreate table statement).

If you set DBA_DB_NUMBERS to YES, dialog and report templates storecolumn numbers instead of names. They can then be processed againsttranslated databases without change. For more information, see the section DBAccess Environment Variables.

The alias_name column specifies a different name for the column that is not bound by SQLstandard restrictions. The column_format column specifies a standard C format string (forexample, "%lG") used when column values are output to custom dialogs built with the DBAccess Administrator Toolkit. The default_value column specifies a string to be displayedwhen there is no current row (for subsequent inserts).

Appendix C: Timestamp Columns CC - 1

Appendix C__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Timestamp Columns

CC - 2 Appendix C: Timestamp Columns


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Appendix C

Timestamp Columns

Timestamp columns can be used to specify a date and time in a database row. They areuseful for indicating when data was entered or updated in a database.

By default, timestamp columns display in the following format:

yyyy-mm-dd:hh:nn:ss.

You can specify a timestamp format with the DBA_TIMESTAMP_FORMAT environmentvariable. The global variable char *dba_timestamp_format can then be modified at any timefrom script. You can also then input timestamp columns using the format specified byDBA_TIMESTAMP_FORMAT. For more information, see the section DM/DB AccessEnvironment Variables.

Format Characters

Yearyyyy Four digits padded with leading zeros.yy Last two digits padded with leading zeros.y One to four digits; no padding.

Monthmm Two digits padded with leading zeros.m One or two digits; no padding.month Name of month. Up to nine characters; no padding.mon Name of month. Three-character abbreviation; no padding.

Dayddd Day of the year. One to three digits; no padding.dd Day of the month. Two digits padded with leading zeros.d Day of the month. One or two digits; no padding.day Name of day of the week. Up to nine characters; no padding.dy Name of day of the week. Three-character abbreviation; no

padding.


Hour

hh24 24-hour mode. Two digits padded with leading zeros.h24 24-hour mode. One or two digits; no padding.hh12 orhh

12-hour mode. Two digits padded with leading zeros.

h12 or h 12-hour mode. One or two digits; no padding.

Minutenn Two digits padded with leading zeros.n One or two digits; no padding.

Secondss Two digits padded with leading zeros.s One or two digits; no padding.

Otheram orpm

Meridian indicator. Two characters; no padding.

a.m. orp.m.

Meridian indicator with periods. 4 characters; no padding.

´text´ Single quotation string is reproduced in destination string.´´ Single quotation is reproduced in destination string.default Any other character is reproduced in destination string.

To capitalize a word or abbreviation, capitalize the corresponding timestampformat element.

Examples

These examples indicate possible formats and the resulting output given the following datestructure:

date.year = 1990date.month = 12date.day = 5date.hour = 10date.minute = 33date.second = 32

format = <m/d/y>buffer = <12/5/1990>

format = "mm/dd/yy"buffer = "12/05/90"

format = "mm/dd/yyyy"buffer = "12/05/1990"

format = "dy, mon d yyyy"buffer = "wed, dec 5 1990"


format = "day, month d yyyy"buffer = "wednesday, december 5 1990"

format = "’’’day = ’day’’, month d yyyy"buffer = "’day = wednesday’, december 5 1990"

format = "’day = ’day, month d yyyy"buffer = "day = wednesday, december 5 1990"

format = "Dy, Mon d yyyy"buffer = "Wed, Dec 5 1990"

format = "Day, Month d yyyy"buffer = "Wednesday, December 5 1990"

format = "DY, MON d yyyy"buffer = "WED, DEC 5 1990"

format = "DAY, MONTH d yyyy"buffer = "WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER 5 1990"

format = "DAY, MONTH d yyyy hh12:nn:ss AM"buffer = "WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER 5 1990 10:33:32 AM"

format = "DAY, MONTH d yyyy hh:nn:ss P.M."buffer = "WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER 5 1990 10:33:32 A.M."

format = "day, month d yyyy hh12:nn:ss am"buffer = "wednesday, december 5 1990 10:33:32 am"

format = "day, month d yyyy hh:nn:ss p.m."buffer = "wednesday, december 5 1990 10:33:32 a.m."

format = "day, month d yyyy hh24:nn:ss"buffer = "wednesday, december 5 1990 10:33:32"

format = "Day’ the ’dth’ day of ’Month, yyyy"buffer = "Wednesday the 5th day of December, 1990"

format = "’The ’sth’ second of the ’nth’ minute of the ’h24th’ hour"buffer = "The 32nd second of the 33rd minute of the 10th hour"

Appendix D: DB Access Error Messages DD - 1

Appendix D__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DB Access Error Messages

DD - 2 Appendix D: DB Access Error Messages


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Appendix D

DB Access Error Messages

The following is a list of DB Access error messages and their meanings.

Error Message Meaning

Attach linkage failed. DB Access could not establish a linkagebetween the current row and a graphicelement.

Cannot attach linkage withmode = "None".

DB Access cannot establish a linkagebetween the current row and a graphicelement because the Linkage Mode fieldis set to None. Select another linkagemode.

Cannot change key column. DB Access uses this column for unique rowidentification. You cannot change a valuein this column.

Cannot delete existingcolumn.

The Create/Alter Table command cannotbe used to delete an existing column in atable (Alter table mode). Only columns inthe add-column list (which do not yet exist)can be deleted.

Cannot modify existingcolumn.

The Create/Alter Table command cannotbe used to modify an existing column in atable (Alter table mode). Only columns inthe add-column list (which do not yet exist)can be modified.

Code list entry not found. You have tried to enter a value in a codedcolumn that does not exist in theassociated code list. You can enter onlyvalues from the code list.

Column must have a name. You have attempted to add a column to atable without specifying a column name.Specify parameters for the column beforeadding it.


Columns per page out ofrange (1-2000).

You have specified too many or too fewcolumns per page for report output. Entera value from 1 to 2000.

Element not found. DB Access could not locate a graphicelement linked to the current row. You canattach an element to the current row. Orchange rows and select Locate Graphic tofind an element linked to the new row.

Error creating templatelibrary "<library_name>".

DB Access could not create the namedtemplate library. Either you do not havewrite access to the directory that you triedto create the library in, or, if the libraryexists, you do not have write access to it.

File "<filename>" not found. DB Access could not locate the file. Checkthe spelling of the filename. Check thatthe path for the file is accurate.

Invalid column name. You have specified a column name that isnot permitted. Key in up to 18alphanumeric or underscore characters.The first character must be an alphabeticcharacter.

Invalid table name. You have specified a table name that is notpermitted. Key in up to 18 alphanumericor underscore characters. The firstcharacter must be an alphabetic character.

Invalid template name"<template>".

You have specified a template name that isnot permitted. Key in up to 20alphanumeric or underscore characters.

Invalid user variable name. You have specified a user variable namethat is not permitted. Key in up to 20alphanumeric or underscore characters.The first character must be an alphabeticcharacter.

Invalid user variable name("wtr_" prefix).

You have defined a user variable with awtr_ prefix. All wtr_ variables arereserved. Rename the variable.

Lines per page out of range(1-999).

You have specified too many or too fewlines per page for report output. Enter avalue from 1 to 999.


Maximum character length(2000) exceeded in uservariable "<variable>".

You have exceeded the length allowed for acharacter user variable. Specify acharacter variable length of 2000 or less.

Maximum field length (200)exceeded.

You have exceeded the length allowed for adialog field. Specify a field length of 200 orless.

Maximum filename length(14 characters) exceeded.

You have specified a filename of more than14 characters. Enter a filename of 14 orfewer characters.

Missing input libraryspecification.

You did not specify an input library for afunction of the Template Librarian utility(/usr#/ip32/dba/bin/templib).

Missing output libraryspecification.

You did not specify an output library for afunction of the Template Librarian utility(/usr#/ip32/dba/bin/templib).

MSLINK already exists. You have attempted to add an mslinkcolumn to a table that already has anmslink column.

No COLUMN or NUMERICfields allowed on "ALL"lines.

You cannot place a column or numeric fieldon an all tables line. These fields must beplaced on a single table line.

No current field. A field must be current for this command.Select a field before selecting the command.

No current line. A line must be current for this command.Select a line before selecting the command.

No current dialog. A dialog must be current for this command.Load a dialog before selecting thiscommand.

No current report. This command requires a current reporttemplate. Load a template before selectingthis command.

No current row. A row must be current for this command.Use the query and current row functions toestablish a current row. Then select thecommand.

No current schema. A schema must be current for thiscommand. Key in or select a schema namebefore selecting the command.


No current table. A table must be current for this command.

Key in or select a table name beforeselecting the command.

No current universe. This command requires a current universeof rows. Use the query functions togenerate a current universe.

No key column(s) definedfor "<table>".

This command requires that a means ofuniquely identifying rows be provided forthe table. See the section DB AccessReserved Tables for information onestablishing key columns.

No MSCODELIST incurrent schema.

You have attempted to add a coded columnto a table in a schema that does not havean mscodelist table. You must createmscodelist before adding coded columns.

No rows found. No rows meet the current query criteria.

No table <table> found. DB Access could not locate the table.Check the spelling of the table name.Check that the correct library is current.

No table <table> found inMSCATALOG.

You have specified a table that does nothave a corresponding row in the mscatalogtable. You can insert a row for the tableinto mscatalog.

No <type> templates foundin library "<library>".

You have tried to load a template from alibrary that does not contain templates ofthat type (dialog, report, script, and soforth). Or you have called a popup list oftemplates (such as the Load from Librarydialog) when the attached library does notcontain templates of the correct type.Attach a library that contains templates ofthe correct type.

Not a graphic session. You must be in vector or raster graphicsmode before executing this command.

RIS Error. An RIS error has occurred. DB Accessdisplays the error. For information on RISerrors, see the Relational Interface System(RIS) for Windows NT SQL User’s Guide.


Schema "<schema>" notfound in schema list.

You have specified a schema that is not inthe current schema list. Check that youhave correctly spelled the schema name. Ifyou own or have been granted privileges onthe schema, you can add it to the schemalist. See the section Build Schema List(Schema Edit).

A schema list is necessary only for multi-schema joins. If no schema list is specified(using DBA_SCHEMA_LIST or the -Scommand-line option), any available RISschema can be attached.

Script template\’<template>\’doesn’t match functionname\’<function>\’.

You have specified a script template namethat differs from the name of the functionbeing saved in the template. The scripttemplate must match the name of thefunction.

Table "<table>" not found. DB Access could not locate the table.Check the spelling of the table name.Check that the correct library is current.

Undefined symbol:<symbol>

The scripting interpreter has encounteredan operand that is unknown. Check thatsyntax is correct and any user variableshave been defined.

Appendix E: DB Access Global Variables EE - 1

Appendix E__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DB Access Global Variables

EE - 2 Appendix E: DB Access Global Variables


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Appendix E

DB Access Global Variables

The following DBA parameters may be modified by the user, either from script ordevelopment platform code. In some cases, the variable is initialized by a shell variable orcommand switch. If these globals are defined before dba_setup() is called, they areoverridden by the associated shell variable or command switch. They can be changed at anytime thereafter.

Some DB Access global variables (such as dba_schema or dba_schema_list) initiate actions.The results of these actions are modified by calling functions (such as dba_schema_select ordba_set_schema_list).

However, many DB Access global variables can be declared extern and altered at runtime asin the following lists (from c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\globals.txt):

DB Access character globals:

(char *)’s are malloc’ed to 100 characters, dbadev users (not script users) canrealloc to desired length, DO NOT FREE!!!

extern char dba_app_id[16]; /* Argurment to ms_application_id(),default = ’DBA’ */

extern char dba_comma_character; /* Embedded Command characters,default = ’,’ */

extern char *dba_error_log; /* Redirects error form output to a namedfile (or /dev/null) */

extern char *dba_last_keyin; /* Contains last field key-in (1000characters max) */

extern char *dba_lib;extern char *dba_lib_list;extern char *dba_print; /* DBA_PRINT command. See the file

/usr#/ip32/dba/cfg/configure.dat. */extern char *dba_prodname; /* Product name (dba, x_dba, etc.) */extern char *dba_script_delimiter; /* Document list delimiter for scripts,

default = ’#" */extern char *dba_shell; /* DBA_SHELL command. See the file

/usr#/ip32/dba/cfg/configure.dat. */extern char *dba_support; /* Directory containing DB Access

form, symbol and message files.This variable must be set beforeany DB Access function call. */

extern char *dba_timestamp_format;extern char dba_unix_delimiter; /* Document list delimiter for unix

commands.Default = ’$’ */

extern char dba_ustn_delimiter; /* Document list delimiter forMicrostation commands.Default = ’!’ */

extern char dba_version[12]; /* Current DBA version (major.minor) */


DB Access double globals:

extern double dba_fl_zoom; /* Same as locate set but only appliesto the review of file linkages */

extern double dba_form_value; /* Value argument from I/Forms notifyfunction.Buttons,toggles – 0 or 1.Fields – Row number.Sliders,scrollbars – gadget value. */

DBA Form globals:

extern Form dba_form_ptr; /* I/Forms Form pointer of the last formnotified. */

DB Access integer globals

extern int dba_attach_mode; /* 0=new, 1=existing, 2=info, 3=none.Used for ustn/raster AttachLinkage.RPT_NO. */

extern int dba_batch_mode; /* 0=interactive, 1=batch,if batch, disables schema passwordprompting, and directs Errors Detectedoutput to stdout. */

extern int dba_columns_per_page; /* Report page width (1-2000). */extern int dba_fence_mode; /* 0=apply fence to query with

prompt (default)1=apply fence to query without prompt2=ignore fence */

extern int dba_form_label; /* Form label of the last formnotified. */

extern int dba_graphic_mode; /* 0=none, 1=ustn, 2=raster, 3=both.NOTE: 3=both allows display of bothustn and raster, but all graphiccommands will run in ustn modeunless set to 2.RPT_NO. */

extern int dba_help_only; /* 0=display help topic, then processcommands,1=display help topic only */

extern int dba_join_to_many; /* 0=do not expect multiple hits injoined tables,1=check for multiple hits injoined tables */

extern int dba_label; /* Gadget label of the last gadgetnotified. */

extern short dba_level_mask[4]; /* Level mask for USTN Review Element andLocate Graphics commands.Defaul t = { -1, -1, -1, -1(all levels) */

extern int dba_level_mode; /* 0=on levels only,1=based on dba_level_mask */

extern int dba_lines_per_page; /* Report page length (0-999). */

extern int dba_link_type; /* 0=multi, 1=range.Used for raster Attach Linkageshape.RPT_NO. */


extern int dba_link_mode; /* 0=RIS, 1=DMRS.

RPT_NO. */extern int dba_menu_lock; /* 0=normal, 1=any subsequent menus

must be canceled before other inputsare accepted or script processingproceeds */

extern int dba_nest_mode; /* 0=simple element, 2=cells.Nest mode for rejecting complexelement headers from USTN;determines what element types willbe selectable. RPT_NO. */

extern int dba_no_put_field_notify; /* Makes dba_put_field() act justlike FIfld_set_text() (instead ofsimulating a user key-in) */

extern int dba_partition_bits; /* RPT_NO. */extern int dba_pause;extern int dba_select_button; /* Button for raster commands

0=left, 1=middle (default),2=right */

extern int dba_status_field; /* Status field number (used inWINDOWS mod */

extern int dba_text_size; /* Report output form text size (1-5) */extern short dba_type_mask[8]; /* Element type mask for USTN Review

Element and Locate Graphics commands.Defaul t = { -1, -1, -3, -1, -1, -1,

-1, -1 }(all types except 34) */

extern int dba_user_entitynum; /* Optional user-defined value foruser links */

extern int dba_user_mslink; /* System-generated value when attaching andreviewing user linkages. */

extern int dba_user_raslink; /* Optional user-defined value foruser links. */

DB Access logical globals: (0 = false, 1 = true)

extern int dba_alias_table_report; /* 0=Use table names in report selects,1=Use table aliases in report selects *

extern int dba_auto_change_all; /* 0=Change All displays SQL Statements form,1=Change All issues update command */

extern int dba_autocommit; /* 0=Don’t let DBA turn autocommit off.1=Let DBA turn autocommit off.Default=0. See the file/usr#/ip32/dba/doc/autocommit.doc */

extern int dba_blank_pad;extern int dba_code_sort;extern int dba_delete_row_toggle; /* 0=Don’t delete associated row.

1=Delete associated row.For Remove Linkage command.RPT_NO. */

extern int dba_dbase_link; /* Honor USTN DBASE links. */extern int dba_dmrs_link; /* Honor USTN DMRS links. */extern int dba_ignore_scroll; /* 0=Notify MCF pokes on scroll bars,

1=No notify. */extern int dba_informix_link; /* Honor USTN INFORMIX links. */extern int dba_insert_read_only; /* 0=Don’t include READ ONLY column

gadgets when inserting rows.1=Include READ ONLY column gadgetswhen inserting rows.(Default =0. This is useful tokeep dialogs with the same columndisplayed twice from giving an RIS


error upon inserts.)RPT_NO. */

extern int dba_mce_restrict; /* RPT_NO. */extern int dba_message_strip; /* 0=Don’t display DB Access or EnvironV

message strip.1=Display DBA message strip.This variable must be set beforeany DB Access function call. */

extern int dba_normal_text; /* 0=Display text as saved onforms/dialogs.

1=Display all text using normalstyle. (Reduces draw time on PCsusing X.)Default=0. RPT_NO. */

extern int dba_no_cursor; /* 0=Display processing cursors.1=Don’t. */

extern int dba_no_formfeed; /* 0=Formfeed between reports pages.1=No formfeed. */

extern int dba_no_join_query; /* 0=Secondary join query is addedfor standard joins.

1=Secondary join query isignored for standard joins. */

extern int dba_no_pop_to_top; /* 0=re-displayed dialogs arepopped to top,

1=no action on re-displayed dialogs */extern int dba_no_review_totals; /* 0=Total numeric columns in review.

1=No totals.RPT_NO. */

extern int dba_no_scaling; /* 0=Scale/move all forms and dialogsbased on terminal size or firstform/dialog.

1=Inhibit auto scaling.Default=0. RPT_NO. */

extern int dba_optimize; /* 0=Don’t optimize.1=Optimize. */

extern int dba_oracle_link; /* Honor USTN ORACLE links. */extern int dba_report_nulls; /* 0=Don’t give error on script or

numeric field NULL column,1=give error (default=0) */

extern int dba_ris_link; /* Honor USTN RIS links. */extern int dba_select_distinct; /* Report select distinct. */extern int dba_scrap;extern int dba_sync_menus; /* 0=Don’t update like-table menus

when current row changes,1=update like-table menus whencurrent row changes (default=0) */

extern int dba_sync_worksheets; /* 0=Don’t synchronize worksheets onvertical scroll.1=Synchronize worksheetson vertical scroll.Default = 1. RPT_NO. */

extern int dba_tmp_output; /* 0=Don’t override report output filename,1=All report output is placed

in TMPDIR (usually /usr/tmp)with a unique name. */

extern int dba_write_access;extern int dba_ws_column_scroll; /* Honors Column Scrolling YES/NO

from builder for worksheets. */


DBA Raster globals:

Some of the following variables can be overwritten by what is set in theraster.ctl file.

extern int dba_border_mode; /* 0=No borders.1=Borders.(Environ V version only.) */

extern int dba_virtual_screen; /* 0=Current.2=Alternate.

(Environ V version only.) */extern int dba_overview_mode; /* 0=On.

1=Off.Used with dba_display_graphics anddba_window_area. You can skip theoverview and go straight to awindow area. */

extern int dba_delete_notify; /* 0=Off.1=On. If setdba_delete_window(int file_id);script will be called whenever awindow is deleted. */

extern int dba_auto_display_links; /* 0=Off.1=On. If this is on, the linkageblocks are automatically displayedon every refresh. */

extern int dba_menu_mode; /* 0=Permanent.1=Pop-up. Used to control thebehavior of the graphics dialogactivated by the left mouse button. */

extern int dba_dec_type; /* 0=Performance.1=Quality. Controls whether or notextra care is taken to preserve thequality of the displayed image, atthe expense of performance. */

extern int dba_fl_mode; /* Same as locate set but applies onlyto the review of file linkages. */

extern int dba_fl_blink; /* Same as locate set but only appliesto the review of file linkages. */

extern int dba_linkage_type; /* 1=Range.2=Multi-sided. Used to controlwhat type linkages will be createdby notes, file, and database links. */

extern int dba_hl_color; /* Default= 4. This is the color used tohighlight during review element.The valid colors are:

LIGHT CYAN 0DARK GRAY 1BLACK 2YELLOW 3LIGHT GRAY 4DARK CYAN 5WHITE 6LIGHT RED 7LIGHT GREEN 8LIGHT BLUE 9BROWN 10DARK RED 11DARK GREEN 12DARK BLUE 13


DARK MAGENTA 14LIGHT MAGENTA 15

*/extern int dba_fg_color; /* Default is 2. Foreground color

of the raster display. */extern int dba_bg_color; /* Default is 6. Background color

of the raster display. */extern int dba_file_link_color /* Default is 11. Attach File link

color. */extern int dba_note_link_color /* Default is 9. Attach Note link

color. */extern int dba_user_link_color /* Default is 3. Attach User link

color. */extern int dba_database_link_color /* Default is 8. Attach (database) link

color. */extern int dba_raster_menu_disable /* Default is 0. If set the dba_g_menu

will not be displayed when the user hitsthe hot key "v". */

extern char *dba_files_path; /* Default graphics directory. */extern char *dba_files_drive; /* Defaults graphics drive. */

To be able to view database links between unix and dos, two globalpointers have been set up. DB Access stores the original locationof a file in the database (dba_files). When a user displays a file,that file is checked against dba_files table to see if it already hasa file number assigned to it. DB Access checks for three filecombination based on the previous pointers.

1) drive_path_filename to database2) dba_files_path/filename to database3) dba_files_drive/path_filename to database

where drive_path_filename is:

/usr/files/demo.tg4or

c:les emo.tg4

where dba_files_path is:

/usr/filesor

c:les

where dba_files_drive is:

/usrorc

If after three attempts to make a match fail, a new entry willbe put into the database.

extern int dba_redline_mode; /* 0=dm redline mode, 1=dba database modethis variable will have an effect on thefollowing "dba standard buttons":

Draw ArcDraw ArrowDraw CircleDraw EllipseDraw Filled Circle


Draw Filled EllipseDraw Filled RectangleDraw Filled Shape

* Draw FreehandDraw LineDraw RectangleDraw Shape

* Draw SymbolDraw Text

** Copy Redline** Delete Redline** Move Redline* Select Redline** Undo Redline

* Draw Freehand, Draw Symbol and Select Redline only work on the pcversion of dba.

** Copy, Delete, Move, and Undo redlines only work on dm redlines.They will NOT work on dba database redlines.

extern int dba_window_names /* 0=Off.1=On. Control variable to determinewhether or not the system supplied windownames are written to the windowborder. */

Glossary GL - 1

Glossary__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GL - 2 Glossary

Glossary GL - 3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Glossary

absolute pathname Sequence of directories, beginning with the root directory (/)that locates a file. See also pathname and relative pathname.

accept Receive input, such as characters, integers, or data buttons.Also, confirming an element selection.

access Perform actions necessary to use software.

add query Key-in mode that lets a user add query criteria.

address Label, name, or number that identifies an exact storagelocation in memory.

alias An alternate label for a command, program, or databaseentity such as a line added to the start-up file that lets youstart the software without having to key in the full pathnameeach time you want to use the software.

annotation Handwriting and other editing marks placed on a documentimage using the graphics tablet or the mouse.

ANSI Acronym for American National Standards Institute, aprivate organization that develops, maintains, and publishesindustry standards in the United States.

application System of programs or utilities designed to accomplishspecific tasks as requested by the user.

array Data structure used to organize data into contiguous lists.

arrow keys Keys used to move from one field of a menu or form toanother.

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchangecharacter set.

attributes The features of an object, such as color, line width, font, andfont size.

bezel Rectangular graphic gadget that has a three-dimensionalappearance.

bit Binary digit represented by a 1 or 0. Smallest unit of storagein a digital computer.

GL - 4 Glossary

bitmap An ordered array of pixels turned off and on to create a

graphical image on a computer screen.

block Unit of storage which usually equals the amount of data thatcan be read from or written to the storage device. Forexample, most disk drives read or write a minimum of 512bytes. Therefore, the block size of most disk drives is 512bytes.

bottom line A line on a report template that prints at the end of eachpage.

breakpoint Interruption of OM processing made possible through ODEN.Breakpoints are set so as to pass control back to the debuggerfrom execution mode.

buffer Data area.

button State gadget that has a three-dimensional appearance andcan be set on or off.

byte Group of bits forming a unit of storage in a digital computer.A byte usually consists of 8 bits but can contain more or fewerdepending on the model of computer. Bytes can also containerror recognition information.

C General-purpose, structured programming languagedeveloped at Bell Labs in the early 1970s.

CAD Acronym for Computer-Aided Design.

change row Key-in mode that lest a user change the value of one or morecolumns in the current row.

char Data type which stores one character.

character Alphabetic letter, digit, punctuation, or symbol.

check box A small box that lets you select or unselect an option. Whenthe check box is selected, an X appears in the box.

checklist State gadget consisting of one or more boxes, followed by textor symbols, usually arranged in a column.

choose To activate buttons, fields, and so forth on forms.

clicking Pointing to a menu command, button, or item on your screenand quickly pressing and releasing the left mouse button.

client Portion of a client/server-based application that requestsservices.

Glossary GL - 5

CLIX Version of the UNIX operating system ported to run on

Intergraph systems.

code list A set of unique column values stored in a join table. A codedcolumn accepts values only from its code list.

coded column A column that accepts values only from its code list. A codedcolumn is represented by a row in the mdcodelist table.

collapse Changing a form or window from the normal display to asmall icon representing the collapsed form or window. Alsocalled minimize.

collection A logical grouping of files for ftr searching and indexing.

column Vertical arrangement of figures or words.

column field On a menu, a gadget that displays values for the current row.On a report template, a field that displays data from aspecified column for each row processed.

command Software that interacts with the user, obtaining user inputand then acting in a specified way based on that input. Eachicon on the menu accesses a command, although there couldalso be additional commands accessed only by key-in.

command line Alphanumeric key-ins used to invoke an executable directlyfrom the operating system environment.

command string Alphanumeric string that corresponds to a given command. Acommand name.

compile Translate a program written in some programming languageinto machine language or assembly language.

compress Process that eliminates gaps, empty fields, redundancies, orunnecessary data in a file so that the size of the file isreduced.

constant Value that remains unchanged during a program’s execution.

Control Menu A list of commands that manipulate the window. Thecommands let you resize, move, close, maximize and minimizethe window, and switch to other applications.

coordinates Ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify alocation in a coordinate system.

counter field A field on a report template that keeps track of how manyinput rows have been processed.

GL - 6 Glossary

cursor Pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item

or area.

Data DefinitionLanguage

(DDL) Subset of the ANSI SQL Standard statements whichdefines the schemas and relations of a database.

data dictionary Either a filed object space that contains information about theclasses that make up an application or a set of ASCII filescreated by a utility called a data dictionary processor (ddp).

data link Automatic method of passing data between two or moregadgets.

Data ManipulationLanguage

(DML) Subset of the ANSI SQL Standard statements whichmanipulate the data contained in a table.

data point Point entered with the mouse or with a precision key-in,which specifies a position in a drawing file.

data structure Structure whose components are data objects. Datastructures are used to group logically related data.

data type Classification of a data item as an integer, letter, or realnumber.

database Collection of comprehensive informational files havingpredetermined structure and organization that can then becommunicated, interpreted, or processed by a specificprogram.

databaseadministrator

User on a database or a schema defined on that user whichhas complete access to all data defined on a database.

date field A field on a report template that prints the system date.

DB2 Relational database management system.

DBA Acronym for Database Administrator or DB Access.

DDL Acronym for Data Definition Language.

DEC Acronym for Digital Equipment Corporation.

default Predetermined value of a parameter or option that isautomatically supplied by the system or program whenever avalue is not specified by the user.

delete To remove, destroy, eliminate, or erase.

delimiter Separating mark or space; a character or sequence ofcontiguous characters that mark the end of a string ofcharacters.

Glossary GL - 7

derived field A field on a report template that prints the results of a

formula.

design file File containing graphic and text data. Also called a drawingfile.

development platform Base or foundation of software on which application programscan be built.

device Nonaddressable component of a network, that is, a componentonto which a user cannot log, for example, tape drive, diskdrive, and floppy disk.

dial Numeric gadget that accepts and displays numerical values ina circular format.

dialog box A box that requests information about a particular task youare performing.

dimmed A button or command that is displayed in light gray instead ofblack. When a button or command is dimmed, it is disabledand nonselectable.

disk Round flat plate coated with a magnetic substance on whichdata is stored.

DML Acronym of Data Manipulation Language.

DM/Manager A software package that provides functionality to managedata and data objects across a large network.

document A file or many files that are handled as one entity to theredlining software.

double Data type which stores a range of floating point numbers.The storage requirement and range of values are dependenton the computer and compiler.

drawing A file that contains graphics or images such as a MicroStationor a CAD file.

drop To discontinue current status or association; to return to aprevious or more primitive status or association; to descendlevels.

edit To add, delete, or change text, graphics, and objects.

enter To enter data from a mouse or from a keyboard.

entity Graphic or descriptive component in a graphics file. Can alsomean a database table.

GL - 8 Glossary

environment variable Variable defined on or across invocations of a command shell.

Processes are given access to the information in thesevariables by the operating system.

error message Description of an error found in a program.

Ethernet Popular implementation of a local area network.

exit To terminate a job or process.

field Any of the data grouped together in a record (also known asan attribute or column). Also, a gadget allowing text entry ona form.

file Collection of logical records stored as a unit.

file locking Process that denies access to a file.

filename User-defined name given to an interactively created file. Thename should be relevant to the contents of the file.

flag A variable that can be set to indicate the presence or absenceof a certain condition.

font Complete set and style of the characters and symbols of atypeface used for displaying text.

form Rectangular display through which a user and an applicationcan communicate using gadgets.

freehand Drawn or done by hand without the use of an instrumentsuch as a ruler or compass.

full pathname Name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file,including the filename. See also relative pathname.

function Small segment of code written to complete a portion of alarger task.

gadget Graphic device on a form that helps a user enter or receivespecific information.

gadget label Unique integer identifier for a gadget, supplied by thesoftware.

gauge Numeric gadget that can only be used to display numericaloutput.

global variable Programming variable that is recognized everywhere in aprogram.

Glossary GL - 9

graphic Any symbol or method of visual communication that is not

text.

grid Network of uniformly spaced horizontal and perpendicularlines that help to identify 2-D or 3-D relationships.

group A collection of icons that represent documents andapplications within the Program Manager.

group gadget User or programmer defined group of logically relatedgadgets.

Help See on-line Help.

Help window Form in which the Help topics are displayed by the Helpprocess.

hit A match found for search criteria.

horizontal Parallel to, in the plane of, or operating in a plane parallel tothe horizon or to a base line.

icon Symbol that graphically identifies a command, application, ordocument.

ID Name composed of numbers or characters given foridentification purposes to a record. A record number.

identify To indicate your selection on a form or graphics by placing adata point on the item.

include file File that contains information such as symbolic constants,structure definitions, variable declarations, and somestandard functions and macros.

index Storage mechanism used to provide faster access to the rowsin a table.

I/NFM Intergraph Network File Manager software package.

INFORMIX Relational database management system.

INGRES Relational database management system.

initialize To set storage location, counter, variable, internal structures,or the like to a beginning value.

int Data type which stores a range of integer values.

integer Value in the set of all positive and negative whole numbersand zero. Also, a data type which stores a range of integervalues. Storage requirement and range of values are

GL - 10 Glossary

dependent on the computer and compiler. Of or relating tothe process of entering data and receiving a response from thecomputer.

interactive Of or relating to the process of entering data and receiving aresponse from the computer.

interface Shared boundary through which the user and softwarecommunicate.

I/ORL Intergraph On-line Reference Library. Provides easy accessto Intergraph documentation on compact disk.

item Unit of storage within a larger unit, such as a file in acabinet.

justification Point of orientation for text placement.

key column Key-in mode that lets a user retrieve the first row in thecurrent table having the specified column value.

key-in Information or command keyed in, rather than selected usinga mouse.

key-in mode Mode that determines the effect of a user key-in in a menucolumn field. The four key-in modes are change row, addquery, update active, and key column.

library Collection of subroutines.

link Combine one or more program segments, subroutines, orlibrary routine into a single executable program.

list box A box that displays a list of available options.

local The physical location of the data on the machine or thelocation of the data by the way of remote mountingcapabilities.

log-in Username/password combination used to gain access to acomputer.

malloc A function provided with the C programming language thatallocates space at runtime. The function’s argument specifiesthe amount of space required. This function returns a pointerto the first address of the allocated memory.

mask Value with bits set on and off to set up certain attributes.

memory Device that can store data.

Glossary GL - 11

menu Means for storing and selecting commands: icon-based,

function key, or paper.

menu bar A list of menus for the window.

message field Forms system gadget that appears along the bottom of a formand is used to display prompt and error messages to the user.

message strip Area of the screen that contains the workstation icon, themessage area and the process ID field.

MicroStation Computer-aided design software.

MicroStation 32 Computer-aided design system for Intergraph workstations.

mode Particular functioning arrangement or condition. Also, thebehavior of a gadget.

mouse Hand-controlled input and command selection device. Thereare several models; most common are the 2-button mouse, the3-button mouse, and the 12-button mouse.

mscatalog Database table required by MicroStation 32 for databasesused with graphics. Key columns defined in mscatalogprovide a means of unique row identification.

mscodelist Database table required for a schema using coded columns.

mslink Column in a database table used to uniquely identify a row.MicroStation uses mslink to specify a row that a graphicselement is linked to.

multiple column field A menu gadget that displays data from one or more columnsin the current row.

network Interconnection of host computers and workstations that letsthem share data and control. The term network can mean thedevices that connect the system, or it can mean the connectedsystem.

NFS Acronym for Network File System. The NFS product lets youaccess files that are physically located on another node onyour local area network (LAN). Network file systems willappear local to the NFS client.

node Any nonaddressable component of a network; that is, anycomponent of the network onto which a user can locally orremotely log.

nodename Symbolic name given to each device on an ethernet networkwhich can be translated into a network address.

GL - 12 Glossary

NULL Indicates no value.

numeric field A field on a report template that provides default calculationson a numeric column value.

occurrence A set of associative geometry elements placed using the PlaceMacro command.

on-line Help Set of on-line, context sensitive files, that provide informationto the user about the capabilities of an application.

operating system System programs that control the overall operation of acomputer system.

operator Symbol that indicates that an arithmetic, logical, or relationaloperation is to be performed.

ORACLE Relational database management system.

ORL See I/ORL.

overview Reduced resolution display of an image in a raster data file.An overview is normally located in the raster data file itself.

page field A field on a report template that prints the current pagenumber.

palette Set or assortment of colors, or a collection of logically relatedmenu buttons, or a level of menu buttons.

panel menu Panel of buttons to the right of the window area. The buttonsare arranged hierarchically and are used to select commands.

parameter Property that associates a variable name with a value.

password Word that is entered during log in that prevents unauthorizedpeople from using the file, software, or computer.

path Sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence ofmenus leading to a command.

pathname Sequence of directories leading to a file. See also absolutepathname and relative pathname.

pixel 1) Smallest possible unit of a screen display that can bemanipulated; 2) Picture element. Small, colored dot of lighton the screen that, when combined with others, forms animage.

place To create and position an element or object.

Glossary GL - 13

portable Designating a program that is easily executed (or can be

easily modified to execute) on multiple computers or softwaresystems.

preface line A line on a report template that prints once at the beginningof the report. After preface lines are printed, the reportcontinues on a new page. Used to print a cover sheet, titlepage, or legend.

preprocessor Program that performs some type of calculation ormanipulations on the data in a file, usually in preparation foranother process.

PRINT Writes data to the request, graphics, and output files whenthe defined event has the specified relationship to VALUE.

privilege Described by the ANSI SQL Standard. A privilege is a rightto access. For example: a relation privilege is a right toaccess a relation (table or view) within a database.

process Entity composed of a program or series of programs.

Program Manager The main window in Microsoft Windows, used to startapplications and open documents. It also organizes theapplications and documents into groups. Within these groupsreside icons that represent each application and document.

prompt Text displayed by a command that tells you the inputsexpected by that command.

query A search in a database.

query criteria Values used to limit a database search.

raster Pattern of horizontal scanning lines on the screen of a CRT:input data causes the beam of the tube to illuminate thecorrect pixels on these lines to produce the requiredcharacters, curves, and so forth.

raster data Generic term that refers to a group of pixels. Each of thesepixels has an associated color and together they form aviewable image.

raster data file File containing raster data (pixels). Raster data files can begenerated by optical scanner, video frame grabber, digitalcamera, interactive paint package, and so forth. Intergraphraster data files are characterized by specific data formatswhich are identified in the file headers.

raster file See raster data file.

GL - 14 Glossary

raster graphics Term that may refer to raster data, canvases, or files.

raster image See raster data.

RDBMS Acronym for Relational Database Management System, thesoftware that lets you organize, store, and manipulate data ina database.

realloc A function provided with the C programming language thatchanges the size of memory allocated from a previous call tomalloc. The function’s argument specifies the new amount ofspace required. A pointer to the new block of space isreturned.

rectangle Graphic gadget that can be used to group related gadgets ordraw solid rectangles.

relation Table or view.

relational database Organizes data in two-dimensional tables to definerelationships.

relational databasemanagement system

Database management system that adheres to conceptsdefined by the relational database model.

Relational InterfaceSystem

Intergraph software system that provides a generic interfacefor applications to access many popular relational databasemanagement systems.

relational operators Operators used to test specified conditions. Used to search forranges of database column values.

relative pathname Sequence of directories leading from the current directory to aparticular file. See also pathname and absolute pathname.

report Standard and user-definable table format for informationqueried from the database.

report template A template that can be processed against input data toproduced formatted output.

resize To change the size and position of a form or window.

resolution Number of pixels of which a screen is composed. The greaterthe number of pixels, the higher the resolution.

restore To erase all editing changes on an image, leaving the originalimage complete.

RIS Acronym for Relational Interface System, the software thatlets different relational database management systemscommunicate with each other.

Glossary GL - 15

rotate To turn; to change the angular orientation; to transform by

revolution about a specific axis.

routine Set of functions constructed to process specific information.

row Grouping of logically related data which may be manipulatedas a single entity. One or more rows make up a file or table.Also known as a record or tuple.

run To execute a program or process.

runtime Time at or during which a program or process is executed.

schema Concept described by the ANSI SQL Standard as a collectionof tables and views. Within RIS, this collection corresponds tothe collection of tables and views within a database.

screen cursor Arrow or crosshairs that are controlled by the mouse.

scripts C-like statements that let you further customize reports.

scroll To move vertically or horizontally through displayed text,symbols, or windows.

scroll arrows Small adjacent buttons on a scroll bar that move the displayup and down, or left and right, depending upon the scroll barorientation.

scroll bar A gadget that lets you move vertically or horizontally throughdisplayed text symbols. Also, a numeric gadget you can use tosend numerical values to another gadget.

select To activate a command. This can be done by the user orsoftware.

server Computer, connected to a network, that provides services toone or more devices on that network. A server can also referto a process that provides services to one or more client(requester) processes locally or remotely.

set Grouping of items that can be manipulated as a single item.

Shamrock Intergraph graphical user-interface toolkit for Windows NT.

shell Body of commands providing interface to low level software.For example, a UNIX shell provides an interface betweenusers and the UNIX kernel.

short Data type which stores a range of integer values. Storagerequirement and range of values are dependent on thecomputer and compiler.

GL - 16 Glossary

slider Numeric gadget that accepts and displays numerical values.

Also, the three-dimensional portion of a slider gadget thatmoves along a linear track.

SNA Acronym for Systems Network Architecture. The primarynetworking strategy for IBM, introduced in 1974. SNA ismade up of a variety of hardware and software products thatinteract together.

SQL Acronym for Structured Query Language.

statement Word or group of words that has a specific meaning in aprogramming language.

states Steps that an item goes through from creation to completion.

stop Terminate a job or process.

storage area Information in DM/Manager that describes a physical locationfor storing files.

string Sequence of characters.

Structured QueryLanguage

Structured language designed for accessing relationaldatabase management systems.

syntax Rules governing the structure and use of statements in alanguage.

system Collection of information and processes designed to interact tocomplete a task.

table Collection of data for quick reference, stored in sequentiallocations in memory or printed as an array of rows andcolumns of data items of the same type.

tap To quickly press and immediately release a button.

template library A CLIX file that stores templates.

text Graphic gadget used to label other gadgets.

text field A field on a report template that prints a text string.

time field A field on a report template that prints the time the reportwas processed.

title bar The area of a window in which the title is displayed.

toggle To switch; to change between two alternatives. Also, a stategadget that can be used to change between two alternatives.

Glossary GL - 17

transaction Concept described by the ANSI SQL Standard. A transaction

is a group of SQL Statements that affect the databasesimultaneously or can be canceled simultaneously.

type Type of data that a programming variable can contain.

universe A group of rows that match the current query criteria. Auniverse is generated by Process Query.

universe review A formatted listing of the current universe. It contains allcolumns that are toggled on.

UNIX General purpose operating system developed at BellLaboratories in the late 60s and early 70s.

update active Key-in mode that lets a user establish a new row in thecurrent table. Used with Insert Row.

user Person who uses a computer.

value Numeric or character data.

variable Quantity that can assume any one of a set of values.

vector Quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generallyrepresented as a line. Vectors can be manipulatedgeometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple(x,y,z).

vector graphics Graphics composed of traditional geometric elements such aslines, circles, curves, surfaces, and solids. Vector geometrycan be represented by mathematical expressions defining allpoints on the geometry.

version The number associated with the specific release of a product.

view Concept described by the ANSI SQL Standard, used tocombine tables or restrict access to columns in a table. A viewlooks and acts like a table, but does not actually store data.

window Independent rectangular area which displays applications ordocuments and that can be moved, resized, reshaped,minimized, or maximized.

window border A border around the outside edge of a window.

Windows NT General purpose 32-bit operating system developed atMicrosoft Corporation.

worksheet A multiple column field that displays data from one or morerows.

GL - 18 Glossary

workstation Terminal that contains an internal CPU and can operate in a

standalone mode or as part of a network.

XNS Communication protocol used on the Ethernet network.

Index IN - 1

Index__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

IN - 2 Index

Index IN - 3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Index

Aaccessing

Database Edit 9-3Dialog Builder 4-7Report Builder 5-6Schema Edit 11-3

Add Query A-1, A-3altering global variables EE-3AND/OR Toggle A-5Application Builder 3-3arrays U-19

automatic resizing U-19ASCII Structure D-5Attach DAP Link A-7, A-10Attach DB Linkage A-12, A-15Attach File Link A-17Attach Note Link A-19attaching

schema 2-5Auto Sequence A-21

BBefore You Begin 1-3Binary Structure D-7Bitmap Loader 8-3bitmap utility 8-3breakpoints

editing 6-9reviewing 6-9setting 6-9

Build Schema List B-1Button B-4

CCancel C-1, C-3Change All C-4, C-6Change Row C-8 − C-9changes to DM/DB Access 2-5character user variables U-19Check Box C-11choose 1-4Clear All Dialogs C-12client

locate R-69

code lists E-1code slots

adding E-2 − E-3deleting E-3

code valuesentering E-4

coded columns E-1adding C-33

Column C-13Column (Report Builder) C-14column values

changing 9-7columns

coded E-1, BB-6, C-33key BB-4, C-32

defining BB-5mslink BB-4serial 9-7timestamp CC-3

Combo Box C-18Copy Field C-19Copy Gadget C-21Copy Line C-23Copy Redlines C-25Counter (Report Builder) C-27create schema

DB2 R-44INFORMIX R-40INGRES R-43ORACLE R-42OS400 R-49RDB R-46SYBASE R-47

Create Sequence C-36create table R-61Create/Alter Table C-29Create/Edit Group C-35Current Row C-38 − C-39Current Row Slider C-40Current Row Text C-42Current Table Text C-44

IN - 4 Index

Ddata definition R-58Database Edit

accessing 9-3graphics linkages 12-4

Database Utilities D-1Date D-3DB Access

graphics linkages 12-4invoking

from MicroStation 12-5reserved tables

mscatalog R-12, R-27templates 2-6

DB2create schema R-44

dba_files 12-10dba_links 12-10dba_points 12-10DBA_RASTER 12-10debugging scripts 6-6Define Structure D-5Delete D-11Delete All D-12 − D-13Delete Field D-15Delete Gadget D-17Delete Group D-19Delete Line D-20Delete Redlines D-21Delete Row R-8, R-12, D-23 − D-24Delete Sequence D-26Delete Space D-27deleting

rows D-12deleting rows D-23Derived D-28Design Options D-30designing dialogs 4-6Dial D-32Dialog Builder

accessing 4-7dialogs

alter table R-64blank 4-5create schema R-37create table R-61data definition R-58database 4-3default 4-3designing 4-6dictionary access R-53

dialogs (continued)drop schema R-51drop table R-63exclude R-66include R-65locate client R-69modify node information R-55modify schema password R-54no database 4-3schema definition R-34schema file R-67schema information R-36schema manager R-32scripts 4-6secure schema access R-52set R-70table information R-60

dictionary access R-53Display Dialog D-38Display Group D-34displayable attributes processing (DAP) A-7

batch A-9DM/DB Access

new features 2-5document conventions 1-4Document List D-40Draw Arc D-43Draw Arrow D-45Draw Block D-47Draw Circle D-49Draw Ellipse D-51Draw Filled Block D-53Draw Filled Circle D-55Draw Filled Ellipse D-57Draw Filled Shape D-59Draw Freehand D-61Draw Line D-63Draw Shape D-65Draw Symbol D-67Draw Text D-69Drop From Group D-71Drop Table D-72Dump Template D-73

EEdit Code E-1, E-5Edit Dialog Parameter E-7Edit Field E-10Edit Gadget E-11Edit Line E-13

Index IN - 5

Edit Privileges E-16Edit Query E-18 − E-19Edit Relations 2-8Edit Report Parameters E-21Edit Script 6-3editing database values 9-7environment variable

II_SYSTEM R-43environment variables AA-3Erase Fence E-23error messages DD-3Exit E-24Expanded Summary E-26

FFence Block F-1Fence Copy F-2Fence Delete F-4Fence Edit F-6Fence Move F-9Fence Operations F-11Fence Shape F-12Field Format (Report Builder) F-13Field Operations (Report Builder) F-18Field Plus F-19fields

column C-14counter C-27date D-3derived D-28formats F-13numeric N-11page P-1placing P-12printing P-13text T-5time T-8

Fields On/Off F-15 − F-16Fit F-20, F-22function variable

displaying 6-10

GGadget Groups G-1Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder) G-2Gadget Sequencing G-3General Utilities G-5graphics

database linkages 12-4linkages 12-4raster 12-3, 12-7

graphics (continued)vector 12-3

Grid G-6Grid Lock G-7Group Box G-9Group Copy G-10Group Delete G-12Group Edit G-14Group Move G-17Group Operations G-19

HHelp H-1

using on-line 1-6

Iidentify 1-4II_SYSTEM R-43INFORMIX

create schema R-40serial columns 9-7

INGRESschema table R-43

Initialize Query I-1 − I-2Insert Row I-4 − I-5, U-9, U-12Insert Space (Report Builder) I-7invoking DB Access

from MicroStation 12-5

Jjoin columns 2-7

multi-schema 2-7outer join 2-8

KKey Column K-1 − K-2key columns BB-4, C-32

defining BB-5key in 1-5

Llibraries 2-6Line L-1line breakpoints 6-9Line Operations (Report Builder) L-3Line Script L-4Linkage Mode L-9, A-12Links Commands L-7List Box L-11Load File L-12, L-14

IN - 6 Index

Load From Library L-15loading templates

query E-18locate client R-69Locate Graphics L-18 − L-19logical operators A-2

MMeasure M-1, M-3memory

reallocation U-19MicroStation

design files 12-3invoking DB Access 12-5MicroStation Command Environment

(mce) 12-6MicroStation commands

Place Fence A-13modify DB2 password R-57modify node information R-55modify schema password R-54Modify Sort M-4mouse 1-4Move Field M-8Move Gadget M-10Move Line M-12Move Redlines M-13mscatalog R-12, R-27mscodelist BB-6mslink BB-4, R-12, R-27, 12-5Multi Gadget M-19Multi-Column Field M-18Multiple Column M-15Multiple Reports M-23multi-schema joins 2-7

NNew Blank

dialog N-1report N-2

New Defaultdialog N-4report N-6

Next Row N-9Numeric N-11

Ooff fields F-15on fields F-15on-line Help 1-6

ORACLEcreate schema R-42

OS400create schema R-49

outer join 2-8Override Key-in O-1

PPage P-1Pan P-3, P-5parts of the Help window 1-6Pick Row P-6Place Fence P-8Place Fence Shape P-10Place Field (Report Builder) P-12Place Gadget P-14Place Line P-22placing fields P-12

column C-14counter C-27date D-3derived D-28numeric N-11page P-1text T-5time T-8

Plot Window P-25, P-27Previous Row P-28print condition P-13privileges

granting E-16revoking E-16

Process Query P-31 − P-32Process Report A-13, P-34

Qqueries

editing E-18loading E-18processing P-31saving E-18

Query Q-1query criteria

adding A-1clearing I-1creating 9-5logical operators A-2processing 9-5relational operators A-2substring searches A-1using 9-5

Index IN - 7

Quit Q-3, Q-5

RRadio Button R-1raster graphics 12-3, 12-7

Cancel C-3commands 12-10 − 12-11Erase Fence E-23Fence Block F-1Fence Shape F-12Fit F-22Load File L-14Measure M-3Pan P-5Plot Window P-27Quit Q-5Rotate Raster R-74Show Links S-18Update U-8Window Area W-3Window Center W-6Window Scroll W-9Zoom In Z-3Zoom Out Z-6

Raster View R-3RDB, create schema R-46Rectangle R-5relational operators A-2, R-6Remove Fence R-8, R-10Remove Linkage R-12, R-15Report R-17 − R-18Report Builder

accessing 5-6reports

blank N-2, 5-5default N-6, 5-3saving S-5unrelated tables 5-6

reserved tables BB-3mscatalog R-12, R-27

reset 1-4Restore Defaults R-19 − R-20Review R-22, R-24Review Element R-26, R-29Review Sequence R-31Review Variables 6-10Rotate R-72Rotate Raster R-74rows

changing values C-4deleting D-12, D-23

rows (continued)inserting I-4, U-9, U-12reviewing R-22unique

identifying BB-4

SSave Dialog (Dialog Builder) S-1Save Options S-3Save Report S-5saving templates

query E-18schema

attaching 2-5Schema Edit 11-3

accessing 11-3schema lists

building B-1schema manager R-32

activating R-32create schema R-37

DB2 R-44INFORMIX R-40INGRES R-43ORACLE R-42OS400 R-49RDB R-46SYBASE R-47

data definition R-58alter table R-64create table R-61drop table R-63table information R-60

dictionary access R-53drop schema R-51exclude R-66include R-65locate client R-69modify DB2 password R-57modify node information R-55modify schema password R-54schema definition R-34schema file R-67schema information R-36secure schema access R-52set R-70

Schema Select S-7Script Debugger 6-6Script Debugger Dialog Options 6-6scripting

dialogs 4-6

IN - 8 Index

scripts

creating 6-3editing 6-3

Scrollbar S-9secure schema access R-52select 1-4Select Redlines S-11serial columns 9-7Set Query S-13Set/Review Breakpoints 6-9Show Group S-15Show Links S-16, S-18Single Column S-19Single Report S-23Slider S-25sort keys M-4space

deleting D-27inserting I-7

Spin Box S-27SQL Statements S-28, 10-3structure templates

ASCII D-5binary D-7user data D-9

Structured Query Language (SQL) 10-3SQL statements

create index BB-6substring searches A-1SYBASE, create schema R-47Symbol S-30System Command S-32

Ttable information R-60Table Select T-1tables

adding mslink BB-4altering C-29copying C-32creating C-29dropping D-72mscatalog BB-4mscodelist BB-6reserved BB-3, C-29

Template Librarian 7-3template libraries 2-6

maintaining 7-3templates 2-6

ASCII structure D-5binary structure D-7

templates (continued)report

ASCII dump D-73blank N-2, 5-5default N-6, 5-3processing P-34saving S-5unrelated tables N-2, 5-6

user data structure D-9templib 7-3Text T-3Text Box T-4text nodes A-7Text (Report Builder) T-5Text Size T-7Time T-8timestamp columns CC-3

UUndelete Fence U-1Undelete Field U-2Undelete Gadget U-3Undelete Group U-4Undelete Line U-5Undo Redlines U-15unique row identification 9-7universe of rows P-31, 9-5universe review R-22unrelated tables N-2

reports 5-6Update U-6, U-8Update Active U-9 − U-10Update Row U-12 − U-13updating database values 9-7User Gadgets U-17User Gauge G-4User Variable U-19user variables

arrays U-19character U-19

Userdata Structure D-9using on-line Help 1-6USTN Command U-22

Vvariables

environment AA-3global

altering EE-3vector graphics 12-3

Index IN - 9

viewing on-line Help 1-6

WWindow Area W-1, W-3Window Center W-4, W-6Window Scroll W-7, W-9Worksheet W-10

ZZoom In Z-1, Z-3Zoom Out Z-4, Z-6

IN - 10 Index

Access

Documents

Transcript of Access